WO2010041568A1 - インダゾール誘導体 - Google Patents
インダゾール誘導体 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2010041568A1 WO2010041568A1 PCT/JP2009/066895 JP2009066895W WO2010041568A1 WO 2010041568 A1 WO2010041568 A1 WO 2010041568A1 JP 2009066895 W JP2009066895 W JP 2009066895W WO 2010041568 A1 WO2010041568 A1 WO 2010041568A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- tert
- general formula
- compound
- compound represented
- Prior art date
Links
- 0 C*C(C1*)[C@](C)C1N Chemical compound C*C(C1*)[C@](C)C1N 0.000 description 2
- QGDYTEIXVINIAV-SANMLTNESA-N CC(C)(C)OC(Nc1cc(OCCN(C[C@@H](c(cc2)cc(N)c2Cl)O)Cc2ccccc2)ccc1C(Cl)=N)=O Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC(Nc1cc(OCCN(C[C@@H](c(cc2)cc(N)c2Cl)O)Cc2ccccc2)ccc1C(Cl)=N)=O QGDYTEIXVINIAV-SANMLTNESA-N 0.000 description 1
- YUAGAQORCNWWDT-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C)(C)OC([n](c1cc(OCc2ccccc2)ccc11)nc1OC(F)F)=O Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC([n](c1cc(OCc2ccccc2)ccc11)nc1OC(F)F)=O YUAGAQORCNWWDT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AFZWXTIJYGCCNG-NRFANRHFSA-N CS(Nc(cc([C@H](CNCCOc1ccc(c(C2CCC2)n[nH]2)c2c1)O)cc1)c1Cl)(=O)=O Chemical compound CS(Nc(cc([C@H](CNCCOc1ccc(c(C2CCC2)n[nH]2)c2c1)O)cc1)c1Cl)(=O)=O AFZWXTIJYGCCNG-NRFANRHFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SJIJLADHGMFAIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N CS(Nc1cccc(C2(CNCCO)CC2)c1)(=O)=O Chemical compound CS(Nc1cccc(C2(CNCCO)CC2)c1)(=O)=O SJIJLADHGMFAIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GMFUJPDFPQDWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N N=C(C1CC1)c(ccc(O)c1)c1NCc1ccccc1 Chemical compound N=C(C1CC1)c(ccc(O)c1)c1NCc1ccccc1 GMFUJPDFPQDWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IYLJBERCGHGQQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oc1ccc(c(C2CC2)n[nH]2)c2c1 Chemical compound Oc1ccc(c(C2CC2)n[nH]2)c2c1 IYLJBERCGHGQQA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AIEDAWNUIDGVRK-DEOSSOPVSA-N [O-][N+](c1cccc([C@H](CN(CCOCc2ccccc2)Cc2ccccc2)O)c1)=O Chemical compound [O-][N+](c1cccc([C@H](CN(CCOCc2ccccc2)Cc2ccccc2)O)c1)=O AIEDAWNUIDGVRK-DEOSSOPVSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D231/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings
- C07D231/54—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
- C07D231/56—Benzopyrazoles; Hydrogenated benzopyrazoles
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
- A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
- A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
- A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
- A61K31/415—1,2-Diazoles
- A61K31/416—1,2-Diazoles condensed with carbocyclic ring systems, e.g. indazole
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
- A61P13/02—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of urine or of the urinary tract, e.g. urine acidifiers
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
- A61P13/10—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the bladder
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a novel indazole derivative having a ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor stimulating action, a pharmaceutical composition containing it, and uses thereof.
- Noradrenaline and adrenaline are known to exhibit various actions on nerves or smooth muscles as neurotransmitters and hormones in vivo.
- adrenergic receptors that bind and respond to the neurotransmitter / hormone are considered target molecules for various therapeutically important drugs.
- Adrenergic receptors belong to the G protein-coupled receptor family and are classified into three subfamilies, namely ⁇ 1, ⁇ 2 and ⁇ -adrenergic receptors.
- all of the adrenergic receptor subfamilies operate by binding to noradrenaline and adrenaline, but are known to use different intracellular signal transduction pathways thereafter, and the ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor increases calcium ions, ⁇ 2
- the adrenergic receptor mainly inhibits adenylyl cyclase
- the ⁇ -adrenergic receptor mainly causes stimulation of adenylyl cyclase (see, for example, Non-Patent Document 1).
- the physiological actions associated with the activation of the subfamily are also different.
- the ⁇ -adrenergic receptor subfamily is further classified into three subtypes, ⁇ 1, ⁇ 2, and ⁇ 3, of which ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptors It is known that the stimulating action increases the heart rate, and the ⁇ 2 adrenergic receptor stimulating action induces relaxation of smooth muscle tissue, and particularly when vascular smooth muscle is relaxed, the blood pressure decreases.
- ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptors have been reported to exist in adipocytes, brain, gallbladder, prostate, intestinal tract, etc. Therefore, ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor stimulating action has been reported to be diabetic, obesity, hyperlipidemia, depression. It is thought to be useful as a preventive or therapeutic agent for diseases, diseases caused by gallstones, increased biliary tract movements, diseases caused by enhanced gastrointestinal function, or diseases associated with a decrease in tears (eg, non-patented) References 2 to 9 and Patent References 1 and 2).
- ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor is also expressed in bladder smooth muscle, and it has been shown that bladder smooth muscle is relaxed by ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor stimulation (see, for example, Non-Patent Documents 10 and 11).
- Receptor agonists are expected to be useful as preventive and therapeutic agents for frequent urination and urinary incontinence in overactive bladder.
- ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor another adrenergic receptor subfamily, has been reported to be expressed in the vas deferens, submandibular, kidney, spleen, liver, and aorta as well as prostate and urethra in rats.
- Certain selective antagonists of the receptor have also been used to treat benign prostatic hypertrophy (see, for example, Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 13).
- Non-Patent Document 12 also describes the relationship between subtype selective activation of ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor and urinary incontinence.
- ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptors are further classified into subtypes such as ⁇ 1A, ⁇ 1B, ⁇ 1D, etc., but selective agonists for the ⁇ 1A subtype are able to act via the contractile action of the bladder neck and urethral smooth muscle, It is expected to be used for the treatment and prevention of stress urinary incontinence.
- beta-adrenergic receptor agonists may be diabetes, obesity, hyperlipidemia, depression, gallstones, diseases caused by increased biliary motility, or diseases caused by gastrointestinal hyperactivity, or frequent urination in overactive bladder
- a adrenergic receptor subtype it is usual to select an agonist with high selectivity for the ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor subtype. That is, as described above, stimulation to the ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 adrenergic receptor subtypes may be judged as a concern that causes an undesirable increase in heart rate or a decrease in blood pressure in some patients.
- ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor which is another subfamily, as a factor causing an unintended secondary physiological action on a blood vessel of a peripheral tissue in some patients.
- Patent Documents 3 to 5 describe specific compounds having the ⁇ 3-adrenergic receptor stimulating action [the following general formulas (4) to (6)]. However, none of the prior documents disclose the compounds of the present invention. Not in.
- Patent Documents 3 to 5 do not disclose selective stimulation of ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor compared to ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor stimulation.
- the present invention relates to an agent that selectively stimulates ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor, particularly an agent that can preferentially stimulate ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor as compared to ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor (hereinafter referred to as “ ⁇ 3 / ⁇ 1 adrenergic”). It is also intended to provide a “receptor selective agonist”.
- the drug minimizes the expression of undesired physiological effects associated with ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor stimulation, while diabetics, obesity, hyperlipidemia, depression, gallstones, diseases caused by increased biliary motility, increased gastrointestinal function It can be used for the treatment and prevention of diseases derived from, interstitial cystitis, overactive bladder, or urinary incontinence, or diseases associated with decreased tears.
- G 1 is represented by —CH (G 4 ) OMe, —OCHF 2 , —OCF 3 , a halogen atom, or the following general formulas (A-2) to (A-3) Group,
- G 2 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an iso-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a benzyl group, or a phenyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
- G 4 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group
- Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 are the same or different.
- G 1 is —OCHF 2 , except for a compound in which G 2 is a methyl group and G 3 is a hydrogen atom; * means an asymmetric carbon. Or a salt thereof.
- R 1 is —CH (R 2 ) OMe or a group represented by the following general formulas (2-1) to (2-2);
- R 2 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group
- R 3-1 , R 3-2 , R 4-1 , R 4-2 , and R 4-3 are the same It may be present or different, and each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- * Means asymmetric carbon. Or a salt thereof.
- G 1 is —OCHF 2 , halogen atom, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group
- G 2 is methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, iso-butyl group, sec-butyl group, benzyl Or a phenyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a chlorine atom, or the compound or salt thereof according to [1] above.
- G 1 is —CH (Me) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group.
- the compound is (R) -N- (3- (2- (2- (2- (2- (3- (1-methoxyethyl) indazol-6-yloxy) ethylamino) -1-hydroxyethyl) phenyl) methanesulfonamide; (R) -N- (3- (2- (2- (2- (3-cyclopropylindazol-6-yloxy) ethylamino) -1-hydroxyethyl) phenyl) methanesulfonamide; and (R) -N- (3 -(2- (2- (3-cyclobutylindazol-6-yloxy) ethylamino) -1-hydroxyethyl) phenyl) methanesulfonamide; A compound selected from the group consisting of or a salt thereof.
- a medicament comprising the compound or salt thereof according to any one of [1] to [8] as an active ingredient.
- the medicament according to [10] which is a preventive and / or therapeutic agent for overactive bladder and urinary incontinence.
- the compound according to any one of [1] to [8] above or a salt thereof is administered to a patient in need of prevention and / or treatment of overactive bladder and urinary incontinence
- a method of operating a ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor in a patient's body A method of operating a ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor in a patient's body.
- [12-1] The method according to [12] above, wherein the administration does not substantially activate the ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor in the living body of the patient.
- [12-2] The method described in [12] above, wherein the patient is a patient who should avoid substantial activation of ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor by drug administration.
- [13] A method for preventing and / or treating overactive bladder and urinary incontinence, comprising administering an effective amount of the compound or salt thereof according to any one of [1] to [8] to a patient .
- [13-1] The method according to [13] above, wherein the patient is a patient who should avoid substantial activation of ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor by drug administration.
- [14] A method for preventing and / or treating urinary incontinence, which comprises administering an effective amount of the compound or salt thereof according to any one of [1] to [8] to a patient.
- [14-1] The method described in [14] above, wherein the patient is a patient who should avoid substantial activation of ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor by drug administration.
- [15] The following general formula (A-4)
- J 1 is represented by —CH (J 4 ) OMe, —OCHF 2 , —OCF 3 , a halogen atom, or the following general formulas (A-5) to (A-6) Group,
- J 2 is a hydrogen atom, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, a benzyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group
- J 3 is a hydrogen atom, a benzyl group, or a tert-butyldiphenylsilyl group
- J 4 is a methyl group or an ethyl group.
- J 5-1 , J 5-2 , J 5-3 , J 6-1 , J 6-2 , J 6-3 , and J 6-4 are They may be the same or different and are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. Or a salt thereof.
- R 1 is —CH (R 2 ) OMe or a group represented by the above general formulas (2-1) to (2-2);
- R 2 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group
- R 3-1 , R 3-2 , R 4-1 , R 4-2 , and R 4-3 are the same
- Each may independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- P 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, a benzyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group
- P 2 represents a hydrogen atom.
- J 1 is —CH (Me) OMe, —OCHF 2 , a chlorine atom, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group
- J 2 is a hydrogen atom, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, a benzyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group.
- J 3 is a hydrogen atom, a benzyl group, or a tert-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
- R 1 represents —CH (Me) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group
- P 1 represents a hydrogen atom, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, a benzyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group
- P 2 represents a hydrogen atom
- the “compound represented by the general formula (A-1) or a salt thereof” or the “compound represented by the general formula (1) or a salt thereof” may be described.
- the compound of the present invention When administered to humans and animals, it has the effect of relaxing bladder smooth muscles due to its potent ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonist activity, and also has the excellent feature of high ⁇ 3 / ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor selectivity. And can provide an excellent pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of overactive bladder and urinary incontinence.
- a halogen atom represents a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
- the compound of the present invention is defined as follows.
- G 1 represents —CH (G 4 ) OMe, —OCHF 2 , —OCF 3 , a halogen atom, or groups represented by the following general formulas (A-2) to (A-3) and
- G 2 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an iso-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a benzyl group, or a phenyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
- G 4 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group
- Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 are the same or different.
- G 1 is —OCHF 2 , except for a compound in which G 2 is a methyl group and G 3 is a hydrogen atom; * means an asymmetric carbon.
- G 1 is preferably —CH (G 4 ) OMe, —OCHF 2 , —OCF 3 , a halogen atom, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group.
- —CH (Me) OMe, —OCHF 2 , a chlorine atom, cyclopropyl Group, or cyclobutyl group is more preferable, —CH (Me) OMe, cyclopropyl group, or cyclobutyl group is particularly preferable, and —OCHF 2 , cyclopropyl group is very particularly preferable.
- —CH (Me) OMe, a chlorine atom, or a cyclobutyl group is preferable.
- G 2 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an iso-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a benzyl group, or a phenyl group, and is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, or an n-propyl group.
- An iso-propyl group or a phenyl group is more preferable, and a methyl group is particularly preferable.
- an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, or a phenyl group is preferred.
- G 3 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a chlorine atom, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom. There is also another embodiment in which a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferred.
- G 4 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
- Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 may be the same or different, and each independently is preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and each independently. More preferably, it is a hydrogen atom.
- G 1 is —OCHF 2 or a halogen atom
- G 2 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, or an n-propyl group and G 3 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom is excluded.
- R 1 is —CH (R 2 ) OMe or a group represented by the following general formulas (2-1) to (2-2);
- R 2 represents a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group
- R 3-1 , R 3-2 , R 4-1 , R 4-2 , and R 4-3 are the same It may be present or different, and each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. * Means asymmetric carbon.
- R 1 is preferably —CH (R 2 ) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group, more preferably —CH (Me) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group, and particularly preferably a cyclopropyl group.
- R 2 is preferably —CH (R 2 ) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group, more preferably —CH (Me) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group, and particularly preferably a cyclopropyl group.
- —CH (Me) OMe or a cyclobutyl group is preferred.
- R 2 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group, and more preferably a methyl group.
- R 3-1 , R 3-2 , R 4-1 , R 4-2 , and R 4-3 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom.
- the carbon atom indicated by * is an asymmetric carbon.
- Examples of the configuration of this asymmetric carbon include S configuration and R configuration, and R configuration is preferable.
- the compounds of the present invention include any optically pure optical isomer based on the asymmetric carbon, any mixture of optical isomers, or racemate.
- the compound of the present invention may further have one or more asymmetric carbons depending on the type of substituent, and all isomers are included unless otherwise specified.
- isomers based on the presence of asymmetric carbons R- or S-isomers, isomers based on ⁇ - or ⁇ -configuration, enantiomers, diastereomers, etc.
- optically active substances having optical activity D -Or L-form, or d- or l-form
- isomers based on the difference in polarity by chiral chromatogram separation high polarity or low polarity
- equilibrium compounds rotational isomers, tautomers or these Any mixture or racemic mixture in any proportion is included in the compounds of the present invention.
- a compound in which R 1 is —CH (Me) OMe and the configuration of the asymmetric carbon indicated by * is the (R) configuration is a mixture of diastereomers, but each optically active compound is also present. Included in the compounds of the invention.
- the “compound represented by the general formula (A-1)” or the “compound represented by the general formula (1)” is represented by the general formula (A-1) or the general formula (1). Generally understood as a free compound. Moreover, the following salts are mentioned as the salt.
- the kind of the salt in the compound of the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be an acid addition salt and may take the form of an intramolecular counter ion.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable salt is particularly preferable as the salt.
- the salts in the compounds of the present invention are generally understood to be pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
- the types of acids that form pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known to those skilled in the art, see, for example, Berge et al. Pharm. Sci. 1-19 (1977), and the like.
- acid addition salts include hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, nitrate, sulfate, hydrosulfate, phosphate, or mineral acid salts such as hydrophosphate, acetic acid Salt, trifluoroacetate, gluconate, lactate, salicylate, citrate, tartrate, ascorbate, succinate, maleate, fumarate, formate, benzoate, methanesulfonic acid Salt, ethanesulfonate, or organic acid salt such as p-toluenesulfonate.
- a salt with an inorganic acid it is preferable to dissolve the compound represented by the general formula (A-1) or the general formula (1) in a desired aqueous solution containing at least one equivalent of an inorganic acid.
- a water-miscible inert organic solvent such as methanol, ethanol, acetone, or dioxane may be mixed.
- a hydrochloric acid solution can be obtained by using hydrochloric acid.
- the compound of the present invention may be an anhydride.
- the compound of the present invention is preferably a hydrate.
- the compound of the present invention is preferably a solvate, but a solvate is also a preferred example.
- the compound of the present invention may be crystalline or amorphous.
- the crystal may be a single crystal, a mixture of a plurality of crystal forms, or an arbitrary mixture of crystal and amorphous.
- a salt of the compound represented by the general formula (A-1) or “a salt of the compound represented by the general formula (1)” or a hydrate of the salt.
- a solvate and may be an anhydrate and an unsolvate of the salt, or a hydrate and / or a solvate of the salt.
- Examples of preferable combinations of substituents in the compound of the present invention represented by the general formula (1) include the following combinations.
- the compound of the present invention, wherein R 1 is —CH (Me) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group, and the configuration of the asymmetric carbon represented by * is the (R) configuration;
- G 1 is —CH (G 4 ) OMe
- G 2 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an iso-propyl group, an iso-butyl group, a sec-butyl group, a benzyl group, or A compound of the present invention which is a phenyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
- G 4 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group
- G 1 is —CH (Me) OMe
- G 2 is a methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, iso-butyl group, sec-butyl group, benzyl group, or phenyl
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
- (11) A book in
- G 1 is —CH (Me) OMe
- G 2 is a methyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom
- G 1 is —OCHF 2
- G 2 is an iso-propyl group, iso-butyl group, sec-butyl group, benzyl group, or phenyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom.
- G 2 is a methyl group
- G 1 is —CH (Me) OMe, a cyclopropyl group, or a cyclobutyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a chlorine atom
- a compound of the invention wherein the configuration of the asymmetric carbon shown is the (R) configuration
- G 2 is an iso-propyl group or a phenyl group
- G 1 is —CH (G 4 ) OMe, —OCHF 2 , —OCF 3 , a halogen atom, or a compound represented by the following general formula (A-2) to A group represented by (A-3),
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom
- G 4 is a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, or an iso-propyl group
- Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 and Z 4 may be the same or different and are each independently a compound of the present invention which is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- G 2 is an iso-propyl group, a phenyl group
- G 1 is —CH (Me) OMe, —OCHF 2 , a chlorine atom, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group
- G 3 is a hydrogen atom, Or a compound of the invention which is a halogen atom
- G 2 is an iso-propyl group, a phenyl group
- G 1 is —CH (Me) OMe, —OCHF 2 ,
- the compound of the present invention can be produced, for example, by the reaction pathways of Schemes 1 to 15 described later, but the production method is not particularly limited.
- the compound of the present invention can be produced by modifying or converting a substituent of a compound serving as a precursor thereof in combination with one or a plurality of reactions described in ordinary chemical literature.
- a free compound is used unless otherwise specified, but in some cases, it can also be produced using a salt of the free compound.
- reaction time is not particularly limited, but the progress of the reaction can be easily traced by an analysis means described later, and therefore it may be terminated when the yield of the target product is maximized.
- “STEP” means a step
- “STEP 1-1” indicates, for example, step 1-1.
- Examples of the protecting group used in the present invention include an indazole (—NH—) protecting group, a hydroxyl group (—OH) protecting group, a methanesulfonamide group (—NHSO 2 Me) protecting group, and an amino group (—NH—). Or a protecting group of —NH 2 ).
- Examples of the protecting group for indazole (—NH—) include trityl group, benzyl group, methylbenzyl group, chlorobenzyl group, dichlorobenzyl group, fluorobenzyl group, trifluoromethylbenzyl group, nitrobenzyl group, methoxyphenyl group, N-methylaminobenzyl group, N, N-dimethylaminobenzyl group, phenacyl group, acetyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, pivaloyl group, benzoyl group, methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group, allyloxycarbonyl (Alloc) group, 2 , 2,2-trichloroethoxycarbonyl group, benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz) group, tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc) group, 1-methyl-1- (4-biphenyl) ethoxycarbonyl (Bpoc) group, 9-fluor
- Examples of the protecting group for hydroxyl group (—OH) include, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms substituted with an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the protecting group for the methanesulfonamide group include, for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, a tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc) group, a benzyl group, a methylbenzyl group, a chlorobenzyl group, a dichlorobenzyl group, Fluorobenzyl group, trifluoromethylbenzyl group, nitrobenzyl group, methoxyphenyl group, N-methylaminobenzyl group, N, N-dimethylaminobenzyl group, tert-butyl group, diphenylmethyl group, methoxyphenyl group, etc. It is done.
- Examples of protecting groups for amino groups include benzyl, methylbenzyl, chlorobenzyl, dichlorobenzyl, fluorobenzyl, trifluoromethylbenzyl, nitrobenzyl, methoxyphenyl Group, N-methylaminobenzyl group, N, N-dimethylaminobenzyl group, phenacyl group, acetyl group, trifluoroacetyl group, pivaloyl group, benzoyl group, allyloxycarbonyl group, 2,2,2-trichloroethoxycarbonyl group Benzyloxycarbonyl group, tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc) group, 1-methyl-1- (4-biphenyl) ethoxycarbonyl (Bpoc) group, 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl group, 2-nitrobenzenesulfonyl group, 4- A nitrobenzenesulfonyl group, , 4-
- the protecting group can be converted to the target compound by deprotecting in the middle of the production process or at the same time or sequentially in the final stage of production.
- the protection / deprotection reaction may be carried out according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition), etc., for example, the following (1) to ( It can be carried out by the method mentioned in 3).
- the deprotection reaction under acidic conditions can be performed, for example, in an inert solvent, in an organic acid, a Lewis acid, an inorganic acid, or a mixture thereof at a temperature of ⁇ 10 to 100 ° C.
- the amount of acid used is preferably 1-fold mol to large excess, and there is a method of adding ethanethiol or 1,2-ethanedithiol as an additive.
- the inert solvent include dichloromethane, chloroform, 1,4-dioxane, ethyl acetate, methyl-tert-butyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, and anisole.
- Examples of the organic acid include acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, methanesulfonic acid, and p-toluenesulfonic acid.
- Examples of the Lewis acid include boron tribromide, boron trifluoride, aluminum bromide, and aluminum chloride.
- Examples of the inorganic acid include hydrochloric acid, hydrogen chloride-1,4-dioxane, hydrogen chloride-ethyl acetate, hydrobromic acid, and sulfuric acid.
- Examples of the organic acid, Lewis acid, inorganic acid, or a mixture thereof include hydrogen bromide / acetic acid.
- Deprotection reaction by hydrogenolysis is performed by adding 0.1 to 300% by weight of a catalyst in an inert solvent, for example, hydrogen gas or ammonium formate under normal pressure or pressure, or a hydrogen source such as hydrazine hydrate. It can be carried out at a temperature of ⁇ 10 to 70 ° C. in the presence. The reaction can also be carried out by adding 0.05 times mole to large excess of an inorganic acid to the above reaction solution.
- an inert solvent for example, hydrogen gas or ammonium formate under normal pressure or pressure, or a hydrogen source such as hydrazine hydrate. It can be carried out at a temperature of ⁇ 10 to 70 ° C. in the presence.
- the reaction can also be carried out by adding 0.05 times mole to large excess of an inorganic acid to the above reaction solution.
- inert solvents include ethers such as tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, dimethoxyethane, or diethyl ether, alcohols such as methanol or ethanol, benzenes such as benzene or toluene, ketones such as acetone or methyl ethyl ketone, and nitriles such as acetonitrile.
- An amide such as dimethylformamide, an ester such as ethyl acetate, water, or acetic acid is used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof can be used.
- the catalyst include palladium carbon powder, platinum oxide (PtO 2 ), activated nickel, and the like.
- inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid and sulfuric acid.
- the deprotection reaction of the silyl group can be performed at a temperature of ⁇ 10 to 60 ° C. using a fluoride ion or the like in an organic solvent miscible with water.
- the organic solvent include tetrahydrofuran, acetic acid, or acetonitrile.
- the fluoride ion may be generated using, for example, tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride, hydrofluoric acid, hydrogen fluoride-pyridine complex, or hydrogen fluoride-triethylamine complex.
- R 1 is as defined above.
- R 10 is a hydrogen atom or a protecting group for the above indazole, and is preferably a benzyl group, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group.
- R 11 is a hydrogen atom or a protecting group for the above methanesulfonamide, preferably a benzyl group or a tert-butoxycarbonyl group.
- R 12 is a hydrogen atom or a protecting group for the aforementioned hydroxyl group, preferably a triethylsilyl group or a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group.
- R 13 is a hydrogen atom or a protecting group for the amino group, and is preferably a benzyl group or a tert-butoxycarbonyl group.
- R 14 represents a leaving group, and examples thereof include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, a p-toluenesulfonyloxy group, and a methanesulfonyloxy group, and a bromine atom is preferable.
- R 10 , R 11 , R 12 and R 13 is preferably R 10 (benzyl group), R 11 (benzyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 13 (benzyl group); R 10 ( tert-butoxycarbonyl group), R 11 (tert-butoxycarbonyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 13 (tert-butoxycarbonyl group); or R 10 (tetrahydropyranyl group), R 11 (tert- Butoxycarbonyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 13 (tert-butoxycarbonyl group).
- Step 1-1 The compound represented by the general formula (X) is subjected to a deprotection reaction according to a known method, for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition). Can be produced.
- a deprotection reaction it is preferable to carry out the deprotection reaction under the above acidic conditions, or to use the above deprotection reaction by hydrogenolysis alone or in combination.
- an appropriate deprotection reaction may be selected for various protecting groups present in the compound represented by the general formula (X).
- Step 1-2 (STEP 1-2) By reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XI) and the compound represented by the general formula (XIII) in the presence of a phosphine and an azo compound in an inert solvent, the compound represented by the general formula (X) is obtained. can get.
- ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane
- halogen solvents such as methylene chloride
- benzenes such as benzene, toluene, xylene, etc.
- phosphines include triphenylphosphine and tributylphosphine, with triphenylphosphine being preferred.
- Azo compounds include diethyl azodicarboxylate, diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethylazodicarboxamide, 1,1 ′-(azodicarbonyl) dipiperidine, or N, N, N ′, N Examples include '-tetraisopropylcarboxamide, and N, N, N', N'-tetramethylazodicarboxamide is preferable.
- the amount of the phosphine used is 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XI) or the compound represented by the general formula (XIII), and preferably 1.5 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the azo compound it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by General Formula (XI) or the compound represented by General Formula (XIII), and preferably 1.5 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- Step 1-3 A compound represented by the general formula (X) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XII) and the compound represented by the general formula (XIII) by adding a base in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent water, methanol, or alcohol solvent such as ethanol, or N, N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, acetone, 2-butanone, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetonitrile, etc. may be used alone. Or a mixed solvent thereof, water, N, N-dimethylformamide, or acetone is preferred.
- the base is an alkali metal compound such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, or potassium t-butoxide, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8 -Organic tertiary amines such as diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, or triethylamine are preferable, and sodium hydroxide is preferable.
- the base is used in an amount of 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XII), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 to 80 ° C.
- With respect to the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- a catalyst such as 0.1 to 1.5 moles of potassium iodide or sodium iodide may be added to the compound represented by the general formula (XII) as necessary.
- R 1 is as defined above.
- R 10 is as defined above, and is preferably a benzyl group, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group, and more preferably a benzyl group.
- R 11 is as defined above, and is preferably a benzyl group.
- R 12 is as defined above, and is preferably a triethylsilyl group or a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group.
- R 15 is a hydrogen atom or a protecting group for the amino group, preferably a benzyl group.
- X 1 is a leaving group, and examples thereof include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, a p-toluenesulfonyloxy group, and a methanesulfonyloxy group, and a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom is preferable.
- R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , and R 15 of the compound represented by the general formula (XIV) R 10 (benzyl group), R 11 (benzyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 15 (Benzyl group); R 10 (tert-butoxycarbonyl group), R 11 (benzyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 15 (benzyl group); or R 10 (tetrahydropyranyl group), R 11 ( benzyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 15 (benzyl group) are preferred, R 10 (benzyl group), R 11 (benzyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 15 (benzyl group) More preferred.
- R 10 , R 11 and R 15 of the compound represented by the general formula (XV) includes R 10 (benzyl group), R 11 (benzyl group), R 15 (benzyl group); R 10 (tert-butoxy) Carbonyl group), R 11 (benzyl group), R 15 (benzyl group); or R 10 (tetrahydropyranyl group), R 11 (benzyl group), R 15 (benzyl group) are preferred, and R 10 (benzyl group). , R 11 (benzyl group) and R 15 (benzyl group) are more preferable.
- R 10 and R 15 of the compound represented by the general formula (XIX) includes R 10 (benzyl group), R 15 (benzyl group); R 10 (tert-butoxycarbonyl group), R 15 (benzyl group) ; or R 10 (tetrahydropyranyl group), R 15 (benzyl group) are preferred, R 10 (benzyl group), R 15 (benzyl group) is more preferable.
- Step 2-1 The compound represented by the general formula (XV) is subjected to a deprotection reaction according to a known method, for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition).
- the compound shown by these can be manufactured.
- an appropriate deprotection reaction may be selected for various protecting groups present in the compound represented by the general formula (XV).
- a deprotection reaction by hydrogenolysis is preferable.
- the deprotection reaction by hydrogenolysis include a reaction carried out in the presence of hydrogen gas by adding a catalyst and hydrochloric acid in an inert solvent.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XV) is added with a catalyst in an inert solvent and reacted in the presence of hydrogen gas, and R 11 (benzyl group) and R 15 (benzyl group) are deprotected and further reacted.
- a particularly preferred deprotection method is a method in which hydrochloric acid is added to the solution and the reaction is carried out in the presence of hydrogen gas to deprotect R 10 (benzyl group) to obtain the compound represented by the general formula (1).
- inert solvent examples include alcohols such as methanol or ethanol, or a mixed solvent thereof, with ethanol being preferred.
- Palladium carbon powder is preferred as the catalyst.
- the amount of the catalyst used is preferably 2 to 40% by weight based on the compound represented by the general formula (XV).
- the amount of hydrochloric acid used is preferably 0.15 to 3 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XV).
- the pressure of hydrogen gas to be used is preferably normal pressure or under pressure. With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 30 to 60 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.5 to 24 hours, and preferably 0.5 to 10 hours.
- Step 2-2 The compound represented by the general formula (XIV) is subjected to a deprotection reaction according to a known method, for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition).
- the compound shown by these can be manufactured.
- Preferable examples include performing the deprotection reaction under the above acidic conditions, or using the above deprotection reaction by hydrogenolysis alone or in combination.
- an appropriate deprotection reaction may be selected for various protecting groups present in the compound represented by the general formula (XIV).
- the deprotection reaction by hydrogenolysis includes the method exemplified in the above step 2-1.
- Step 2-3 This can be carried out according to the method described in International Publication No. WO 03/035620 (incorporated herein by reference). That is, the compound represented by the general formula (XV) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XVIII) with a reducing agent in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent examples include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, and 2-propanol, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, and dimethyl sulfoxide.
- reducing agent examples include sodium borohydride, sodium cyanoborohydride, or borane.
- an optically active substance As a technique for obtaining an optically active substance, there is a technique in which a racemic mixture is converted into an optically active substance by fractional crystallization after an addition salt with an optically active acid such as camphorsulfonic acid or mandelic acid. Moreover, the method of isolate
- the asymmetric reduction reaction for example, a method described in WO 00/58287 (incorporated herein by reference), that is, asymmetric reduction is performed together with a hydrogen supply compound in the presence of an asymmetric reduction catalyst. The method etc. are mentioned.
- Step 2-4 A compound represented by the general formula (XIV) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XVI) and the compound represented by the general formula (XIX) by adding a base in an inert solvent as necessary. It is done.
- N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethylsulfoxide, acetonitrile or the like can be used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof can be used, and N, N-dimethylformamide is preferable.
- the base include tertiary amines such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, or alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, or sodium bicarbonate. Triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine is preferred.
- Examples of the amount of the base used include 0 to 10 times mol, preferably 0 to 5 times mol, of the compound represented by the general formula (XVI).
- the molar ratio is preferable, and the molar ratio is particularly preferably 0.5 to 2 times.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 to 80 ° C.
- With respect to the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 2 to 20 hours.
- a catalyst such as 0.1 to 1.5 moles of potassium iodide and sodium iodide may be added to the compound represented by the general formula (XVI) as necessary.
- Step 2-5 A compound represented by the general formula (XV) is obtained by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XVII) with a compound represented by the general formula (XIX) in an inert solvent.
- alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, or 2-propanol, or N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, or acetonitrile alone are used. These may be used or a mixed solvent thereof, but 2-propanol is preferred.
- the mole is preferably 0.75 to 1.5 times the mole.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 60 ° C. to heating under reflux.
- the reaction time it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 12 to 48 hours.
- a Lewis acid catalyst may be added.
- Step 2-6 By reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XIX) and the compound represented by the general formula (XX) in an inert solvent by adding a base as necessary, a compound represented by the general formula (XVIII) is obtained. It is done.
- the inert solvent N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetonitrile or the like may be used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof may be mentioned, but N, N-dimethylformamide is preferable. Is exemplified.
- Bases include organic tertiary amines such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, or alkali metals such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, or sodium bicarbonate Examples thereof include triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine.
- the amount of the base used is exemplified by 0 to 10 times mol, preferably 0 to 5 times mol, of the compound represented by the general formula (XX).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 to 80 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 2 to 20 hours.
- a catalyst such as 0.1 to 1.5 times moles of potassium iodide or sodium iodide may be added to the compound represented by the general formula (XX) as necessary.
- the thus-obtained compound of the present invention and the respective starting compounds and intermediates can be isolated and purified according to conventional methods such as extraction, distillation, chromatography, and crystallization.
- R 11 is as defined above, and a benzyl group is preferred.
- X 1 is as defined above, and is preferably a chlorine atom.
- Step 3-1 For example, compound (XXIII) is obtained by reacting 3-aminoacetophenone (XXI) and methanesulfonyl chloride (XXII), which are commercially available from Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., with a base in an inert solvent. can get.
- XXIII 3-aminoacetophenone
- XXII methanesulfonyl chloride
- the inert solvent examples include hydrocarbon solvents such as toluene, halogen hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, chloroform, or 1,2-dichloroethane, and acetonitrile.
- the base examples include an organic base such as triethylamine, N, N-diisopropylethylamine, or pyridine, or an inorganic base such as potassium carbonate or sodium bicarbonate.
- the amount of the base used is 1 to 6-fold mol with respect to 3-aminoacetophenone (XXI), and preferably 1 to 3-fold mol.
- the amount of methanesulfonyl chloride (XXII) to be used is usually 1 to 6 times mol, preferably 1 to 3 times mol, relative to 3-aminoacetophenone (XXI).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 to 60 ° C., preferably ⁇ 10 to 30 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.2 to 24 hours.
- Step 3-2 The protection reaction of the sulfonamide group of compound (XXIII) is carried out according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition), etc., by the general formula (XXIV)
- the compound shown is obtained.
- R 11 is a benzyl group
- a compound (XXIII) and a benzylating agent are reacted in an inert solvent by adding a base and a catalyst to obtain a compound represented by the general formula (XXIV). Is mentioned.
- Examples of the inert solvent include ketone solvents such as acetone, aprotic polar solvents such as N, N-dimethylformamide, and the like, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- Examples of the benzylating agent include benzyl iodide, benzyl bromide, or benzyl chloride, and benzyl chloride is preferred.
- Examples of the base include organic bases such as triethylamine, N, N-diisopropylethylamine, or pyridine, or inorganic bases such as potassium carbonate or sodium bicarbonate, and potassium carbonate is preferable.
- Examples of the catalyst include potassium iodide and sodium iodide, and sodium iodide is preferable.
- the amount of base used is preferably 1 to 5 moles compared to Compound (XXIII).
- the amount of the catalyst used is preferably 0.005 to 0.05 moles compared to Compound (XXIII).
- the reaction temperature it can be 0 to heating under reflux, and preferably 50 ° C. to 100 ° C.
- the reaction time is preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- Step 3-3 A compound represented by the general formula (XX) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXIV) in an inert solvent by adding a halogenating agent and further adding methanol as necessary.
- inert solvent examples include halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, 1,2-dichloroethane, and chloroform, with dichloromethane being preferred.
- halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, 1,2-dichloroethane, and chloroform
- halogenating agent examples include chlorine gas, bromine gas, and sulfuryl chloride, and sulfuryl chloride is preferable.
- the amount of the halogenating agent used is preferably 1 to 2 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXIV). With respect to the use amount of methanol, it can be 0 to 5 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXIV), and preferably 0.1 to 2 moles.
- the reaction temperature is preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. to 50 ° C.
- the reaction time is preferably 1 to 10 hours including the dropping time of the halogenating agent and methanol.
- Step 3-4 A compound represented by the general formula (XXV) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XX) with a reducing agent in an organic solvent.
- organic solvent examples include alcohol solvents such as methanol or ethanol, or ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran.
- ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran.
- reducing agent examples include sodium borohydride.
- a method for carrying out an asymmetric reduction reaction can be mentioned.
- the asymmetric reduction reaction is described in ordinary chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 26, pages 23-68, or the reference thereof. It can be carried out according to the method.
- a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXV) by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XX) in an organic solvent in the presence of a hydrogen source by adding a catalyst is a method for carrying out an asymmetric reduction reaction.
- organic solvent examples include alcohol solvents such as methanol, ethanol, or 2-propanol, ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran, halogenated hydrocarbon solvents such as dichloromethane, 1,2-dichloroethane, and chloroform, ester solvents such as ethyl acetate, or Acetonitrile or the like is used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof can be used.
- the hydrogen source include hydrogen gas or formic acid-triethylamine complex, and formic acid-triethylamine complex is preferable.
- Examples of the catalyst include arene-chiral diamine-ruthenium (II) complexes and the like, [(s, s) -N- (p-toluenesulfonyl) -1,2-diphenylethylenediamine] -p-cymene-ruthenium complex, Or [(s, s) -N- (p-toluenesulfonyl) -1,2-diphenylethylenediamine] -mesitylene-ruthenium complex is preferred.
- the amount of formic acid-triethylamine complex used is preferably 1 to 10 moles per mole of the compound represented by the general formula (XX) based on the number of moles of formic acid.
- the ratio of formic acid-triethylamine complex is preferably 1 to 10 moles of formic acid with respect to triethylamine.
- the reaction temperature it can be 0 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 20 ° C. to heating under reflux.
- With respect to the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 24 hours including the dropwise addition time of formic acid-triethylamine complex, and preferably 0.5 to 12 hours.
- Step 3-5 A compound represented by the general formula (XVII) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXV) by adding a base in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent water, methanol, or alcohol solvent such as ethanol, or N, N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, acetone, 2-butanone, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetonitrile, etc. may be used alone. Or a mixed solvent thereof, and methanol is preferable.
- Bases include alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, 28% sodium methoxide-methanol solution, or potassium t-butoxide, or Examples thereof include organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine, and a 28% sodium methoxide-methanol solution is preferred.
- alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, 28% sodium methoxide-methanol solution, or potassium t-butoxide
- organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undec
- the amount of the base used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXV).
- the reaction temperature it can be -40 ° C to heating under reflux, and preferably -10 to 50 ° C.
- reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 2 to 20 hours.
- R 11 is as defined above, and is preferably a benzyl group or a tert-butoxycarbonyl group.
- R 12 is as defined above, and is preferably a triethylsilyl group or a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group.
- R 13 is as defined above, and is preferably a hydrogen atom, a benzyl group, or a tert-butoxycarbonyl group.
- R 14 is as defined above, and is preferably a p-toluenesulfonyloxy group, a methanesulfonyloxy group, or a bromine atom.
- X 1 is as defined above, and examples include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and an iodine atom is preferable.
- R 11 , R 12 and R 13 of the compound represented by the general formula (XI) R 11 (benzyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group), R 13 (benzyl group); or R 11 (tert) -Butoxycarbonyl group), R 12 (triethylsilyl group) and R 13 (tert-butoxycarbonyl group) are preferred.
- Step 4-1 The hydroxyl group protecting reaction of the compound represented by the general formula (XXV), which can be obtained by the production method described in Scheme 3 and the like, is performed by a known method, for example, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition).
- the compound represented by the general formula (XVI) can be obtained by carrying out according to the method described in 1.
- Preferable examples include a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XVI) by adding a base to the compound represented by the general formula (XXV) in an inert solvent and reacting with a silylating agent.
- the inert solvent include N, N-dimethylformamide.
- the base include imidazole.
- the silylating agent include triethylchlorosilane and tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane.
- Step 4-2 (STEP 4-2) This can be carried out in accordance with the method described in International Publication No. WO03 / 035620. That is, the compound represented by the general formula (XVI) and the compound represented by the general formula (XXVI) are reacted in a non-solvent or an inert solvent by adding a base as necessary. Is obtained.
- N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetonitrile or the like may be used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof may be used, but N, N-dimethylformamide is preferred.
- Bases include organic tertiary amines such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, or alkali metals such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, or sodium bicarbonate Examples thereof include triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine.
- the amount of the base used is 0 to 10-fold mol, preferably 1 to 5-fold mol based on the compound represented by the general formula (XVI). With respect to the use amount of the compound represented by the Formula (XXVI), it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XVI), and preferably 1 to 5 moles. With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, preferably 50 ° C. to heating under reflux. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- a catalyst such as 0.1 to 1.5 times moles of potassium iodide or sodium iodide may be added to the compound represented by the general formula (XVI) as necessary.
- Step 4-3 The compound represented by the general formula (XI) is converted into a conventional chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volumes 19, pages 438-446, or a reference thereof.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XII) can be obtained by carrying out according to the method described in the literature.
- Preferable examples include a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XII) by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XI) by adding a halogenating reagent and a phosphine in an inert solvent.
- Examples of the inert solvent include halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane or chloroform, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran, hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene or toluene, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- dichloromethane is preferred.
- Examples of the halogenating reagent include carbon tetrachloride, N-chlorosuccinimide, N-bromosuccinimide, carbon tetrachloride, and N-iodosuccinimide, and N-bromosuccinimide is preferable.
- Examples of phosphines include triphenylphosphine and n-butylphosphine, with triphenylphosphine being preferred.
- the amount of the halogenating reagent used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XI).
- the amount of the phosphine used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XI).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 24 hours, and preferably 0.5 to 12 hours.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XI) can be obtained by adding a base in an inert solvent as required in the inert solvent and reacting with a halogenating reagent.
- inert solvent examples include halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane or chloroform, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran, hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene or toluene, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- halogenating reagent examples include thionyl chloride or thionyl bromide.
- base examples include triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, and organic tertiary amines such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene.
- the amount of the halogenating reagent used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XI). With respect to the use amount of the base, it can be 0 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XI), and preferably 1 to 10 times. With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. to 40 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.1 to 24 hours, and preferably 0.5 to 12 hours.
- R 1 is as defined above.
- R 10 is as defined above, and is preferably a benzyl group, a tert-butoxycarbonyl group, or a tetrahydropyranyl group, and more preferably a benzyl group.
- R 15 is as defined above, and is preferably a benzyl group.
- R 16 is a hydrogen atom or a protecting group of amino group, or in the case of a protecting group of the amino group of the same group as R 15, or selectively enables deprotected against R 15 It is preferable that it is a group.
- R 15 is a group that can be selectively deprotected with respect to R 16 is preferable.
- X 2 represents a leaving group, and examples thereof include a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom, a p-toluenesulfonyloxy group, and a methanesulfonyloxy group.
- R 15 and R 16 of the compound represented by the general formula (XXVII) are preferable.
- R 10 and R 15 of the compound represented by the general formula (XIX) R 10 (benzyl group) and R 15 (benzyl group) are preferable.
- R 15 (benzyl group), a compound represented by R 16 (benzyl group); R 15 (benzyl group), a compound represented by R 16 (hydrogen atom); R 15 (a hydrogen atom ),
- R 16 (hydrogen atom) is available from Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
- Step 5-1 A compound represented by the general formula (XXVIII) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXVII) by adding a base and a sulfonylating reagent in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent examples include halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane or chloroform, or ethers such as tetrahydrofuran, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- Bases include organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, or potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, or sodium bicarbonate.
- An alkali metal compound is mentioned.
- the sulfonylating reagent examples include p-toluenesulfonyl chloride and methanesulfonyl chloride.
- the sulfonylating reagent can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXVII), and preferably 1 to 2 moles.
- the use amount of the base it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXVII), and preferably 1 to 2 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. or higher to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 10 to 50 ° C.
- the reaction time is usually 0.1 to 24 hours, and preferably 1 to 10 hours including the dropping time of the reagent.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXVII) can be converted into a conventional chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 19, pages 438-446, or It can carry out according to the method as described in the reference etc., and the compound shown by general formula (XXVIII) can also be obtained.
- a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXVIII) by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XXVII) with an addition of a halogenating reagent and a phosphine in an inert solvent can be mentioned.
- inert solvent examples include halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane or chloroform, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran, hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene or toluene, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- halogenating reagent examples include carbon tetrachloride, N-chlorosuccinimide, N-bromosuccinimide, carbon tetrabromide, or N-iodosuccinimide.
- phosphines include triphenylphosphine and n-butylphosphine, with triphenylphosphine being preferred.
- the amount of the halogenating reagent to be used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXVII).
- the amount of the phosphine used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXVII).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 10 to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 24 hours, and preferably 0.5 to 12 hours.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXVII) can be obtained by adding a base in an inert solvent as necessary and reacting with a halogenating reagent. .
- inert solvent examples include halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane or chloroform, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran, hydrocarbon solvents such as benzene or toluene, or a mixed solvent thereof. .
- halogenating reagent examples include thionyl chloride, thionyl bromide, phosphorus tribromide, and the like.
- base examples include organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene.
- the amount of the halogenating reagent used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXVII). With respect to the use amount of the base, it can be 0 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXVII), and preferably 1 to 10 times. With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be ⁇ 10 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. to 40 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.1 to 24 hours, and preferably 0.5 to 12 hours.
- Step 5-2 A compound represented by the general formula (XXIX) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XIII) and the compound represented by the general formula (XXVIII) by adding a base in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent examples include tetrahydrofuran, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetonitrile, and the like, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- Examples of the base include alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, 28% sodium methoxide-methanol solution, or potassium t-butoxide, or Examples thereof include organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine.
- alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, 28% sodium methoxide-methanol solution, or potassium t-butoxide
- organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine.
- the use amount of the base it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XIII), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the compound represented by the Formula (XXVIII) it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XIII), and preferably 1 to 3 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. or higher to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 to 60 ° C.
- the reaction time is 0.1 to 48 hours, preferably 2 to 24 hours including the reagent dropping time.
- a catalyst such as 0.1 to 1.5 times moles of potassium iodide or sodium iodide may be added to the compound represented by the general formula (XXVIII) as necessary.
- Step 5-3 When removal of the protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXIX) is necessary, according to a known method, for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 version), The deprotection reaction of R 16 may be selectively performed on R 10 and R 15 . There is also another embodiment in which the deprotection reaction of R 15 is selectively performed on R 10 and R 16 .
- the conditions include a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XIX) by controlling the reaction by adding a catalyst and hydrochloric acid in an inert solvent in the presence of hydrogen gas at normal pressure or under pressure. .
- the inert solvent examples include methanol or an alcohol solvent such as ethanol, and ethanol is preferable.
- the catalyst palladium carbon powder is preferable.
- the amount of the catalyst used is 1 to 40% by weight, preferably 5 to 40% by weight, based on the compound represented by the general formula (XXIX).
- the use amount of hydrochloric acid it can be 0.05 to 3 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXIX), and preferably 0.1 to 1 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be 0 to 60 ° C, and preferably 0 to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 24 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- R 1 , R 10 , R 15 , and R 16 are as defined above.
- Step 6-1 By reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XIII) and a compound represented by the general formula (XXVII) by adding a phosphine and an azo compound in an inert solvent, the compound represented by the general formula (XXIX) is reacted. Obtainable.
- inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane, halogen solvents such as methylene chloride, or benzenes such as benzene, toluene, or xylene, and toluene or tetrahydrofuran is preferable.
- phosphines include triphenylphosphine or tributylphosphine, with triphenylphosphine being preferred.
- Examples of the azo compound include diethyl azodicarboxylate, diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethylazodicarboxamide, or 1,1 ′-(azodicarbonyl) dipiperidine, N, N, N ′. , N′-tetraisopropylcarboxamide and the like, and N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethylazodicarboxamide is preferable.
- Examples of the amount of the phosphine used include 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XIII), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the azo compound it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XIII), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the compound represented by the Formula (XXVII) it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XIII), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 to 30 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 1 to 48 hours, and preferably 3 to 24 hours.
- R 2 and R 10 are as defined above.
- R 17 is a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl-protecting group, and is preferably a benzyl group or tert-butyldiphenylsilyl. Note that the compound represented by the general formula (XXX) can be obtained by the method described in Scheme 9.
- Step 7-1 The compound represented by the general formula (XXX) is converted into a general chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Vol.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXI) can be obtained by carrying out the reaction according to the method described in the reference literature.
- a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXI) by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXX) with an oxidizing agent in an inert solvent.
- the inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, or dimethoxyethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene, and xylene, or halogens such as dichloromethane, chloroform, or 1,2-dichloroethane. Hydrocarbons or the like may be used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof may be mentioned, and a mixed solvent of dichloromethane and tetrahydrofuran is preferred.
- ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, or dimethoxyethane
- benzenes such as benzene, toluene, and xylene
- halogens such as dichloromethane, chloroform, or 1,2-dichloroethane.
- Hydrocarbons or the like may be used alone, or a
- oxidizing agent examples include 1,1,1, -triacetoxy-1,1-dihydro-1,2-benziodoxol-3 (1H) -one, 2-iodoxybenzoic acid, pyridinium chlorochromate, active dioxide Manganese, dimethyl sulfoxide-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, dimethyl sulfoxide-acetic anhydride, dimethyl sulfoxide-trifluoroacetic anhydride, dimethyl sulfoxide-thionyl chloride, dimethyl sulfoxide-oxalyl chloride, dimethyl sulfide-N-chlorosuccinimide, dimethyl sulfoxide-chlorine gas, oxoammonium Examples thereof include salts or tetrapropylammonium perruthenium, and active manganese dioxide is preferred.
- the necessary amount of the oxidizing agent is 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXX).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 20 to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- the amount of the oxidizing agent can be reduced to a catalytic amount by coexisting the oxidizing agent and a reoxidizing agent such as 4-methylmorpholine-N-oxide.
- Step 7-2 The compound represented by the general formula (XXXI) is described in the 4th edition Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 25, pages 60-72, or references described in this document.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXII) can be obtained by performing the reaction according to the method.
- a method for obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXII) by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XXXI) by adding a Grignard reagent for introducing R 2 in an inert solvent Is mentioned.
- the inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, and dimethoxyethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene, and xylene, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- the Grignard reagent for introducing R 2 is preferably a commercially available Grignard reagent or prepared according to a conventional method.
- the amount of Grignard reagent used for the introduction of R 2 is preferably 1 to 5 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXI).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 20 to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- a method for carrying out an asymmetric carbon-carbon bond synthesis reaction can be mentioned.
- the asymmetric carbon-carbon bond synthesis reaction can be carried out by using the usual chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 26, pages 68-158, or a reference thereof. It can carry out according to the method described in the above.
- Step 7-3 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXII) is converted into a conventional chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 20, pages 187-200, or described in this literature.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXIII) can be obtained by carrying out the reaction according to the method described in the reference literature.
- Preferable examples include a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXIII) by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXII) with an addition of a base and a methylating agent in an inert solvent.
- ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, dimethoxyethane, or aprotic polar solvents such as N, N-dimethylformamide are used alone, or a mixture thereof.
- aprotic polar solvents such as N, N-dimethylformamide
- examples of the solvent include N, N-dimethylformamide.
- Bases such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, cesium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, barium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, sodium hydride, potassium hydride, or potassium t-butoxide
- alkali metal compound include organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, and triethylamine, and sodium hydride is preferable.
- the methylating agent include dimethyl sulfate and methyl iodide, and methyl iodide is preferable.
- the amount of the base used is preferably 1 to 5 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXII).
- the amount of the methylating agent to be used is preferably 1 to 5 moles compared to the compounds represented by the general formula (XXXII).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 20 to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- Step 7-4 When removal of the protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXIII) is necessary, it is carried out according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition). Thus, a compound represented by the general formula (XXXIV) is obtained. Preferable examples include the method described in Reference Example 26.
- R 1 is a group obtained by removing —CH (R 2 ) OMe from the group defined above.
- R 17 is a hydroxyl-protecting group, preferably a methoxymethyl group, a benzyl group, or a tert-butyldimethylsilyl group.
- Step 8-1 The hydroxyl group protecting reaction of the compound (XXXV) available from Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. is in accordance with a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition). Just do it.
- a preferable example includes a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXVI) by reacting the compound (XXXV) with an inert solvent by adding a base and a protective reagent.
- halogen-based hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, chloroform, or 1,2-dichloroethane, or aprotic polar solvents such as N, N-dimethylformamide are used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof.
- Bases include organic tertiary amines such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, or alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, or sodium bicarbonate And triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, potassium carbonate, or imidazole is preferable.
- the protective reagent include tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane, methoxymethyl chloride, benzyl chloride, or benzyl bromide.
- Examples of the amount of the base used include 1 to 5 moles compared to the compound (XXXVI).
- the protecting reagent is exemplified by 1 to 5 moles compared to Compound (XXXVI).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 to 40 ° C.
- With respect to the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- Step 8-2 The compound represented by the general formula (XXXVI) is converted into a conventional chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), 25, pages 59-82, or described in this literature.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXVII) can be obtained by carrying out in accordance with the method described in the reference literature.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXVI) is reacted in an inert solvent by adding a Grignard reagent for introducing the R 1 group and, if necessary, a catalyst to form an imine.
- a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXVII) by hydrolysis may be mentioned.
- the inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane, or benzenes such as benzene, toluene, and xylene, or a mixed solvent thereof, such as diethyl ether, or Tetrahydrofuran is preferred.
- ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane
- benzenes such as benzene, toluene, and xylene
- a mixed solvent thereof such as diethyl ether, or Tetrahydrofuran is preferred.
- Grignard reagent for R 1 commercially available Grignard reagents, Grignard reagents prepared according to the methods described in the above chemical literature, or the references described in the above chemical literature, or other known methods other than these methods are used.
- cyclobutyl magnesium bromide can be prepared by adding magnesium, a small amount of iodine, and bromocyclobutane in dehydrated diethyl ether solvent.
- the catalyst include lithium salts such as lithium chloride, or copper salts or copper complexes such as copper cyanide, copper chloride, copper bromide, copper bromide dimethyl sulfide complex, and copper iodide, and copper bromide is preferable.
- Examples of the amount of Grignard reagent used include 1 to 5 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXVI).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and 0 ° C. to heating under reflux is preferable.
- With respect to the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- Step 8-3 When removal of the protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXVII) is necessary, it is carried out according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 version). Thus, a compound represented by the general formula (XXXVIII) is obtained.
- the step 12-2 and step 12-3 by selecting R 17 suitably may be carried out continuously.
- Step 8-4 Compound (XIII) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXVIII) in an inert solvent by adding hydrazines and adding a base as necessary.
- alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol or 2-butanol, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran or dimethoxyethane, or benzenes such as benzene, toluene or xylene may be used alone. Or a mixed solvent thereof, and xylene is preferred.
- hydrazines include benzylhydrazine, benzylhydrazine-1 hydrochloride, benzylhydrazine-2 hydrochloride, hydrazine-1 hydrate, or hydrazine-hydrate, and benzylhydrazine-1 hydrochloride is preferred.
- the base include alkali metal compounds such as sodium acetate, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, or sodium bicarbonate, and sodium acetate is preferred.
- Examples of the amount of hydrazine used include 1 to 5 moles compared to the compounds represented by the general formula (XXXVIII), and preferably 1 to 3 moles.
- the use amount of the base it can be 0 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXVIII), more preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be 0 ° C. to heating under reflux, and more preferably 50 ° C. to heating under reflux.
- With respect to the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 3 to 24 hours.
- the reaction system may be pressurized while sealing the reaction vessel.
- the reaction temperature can be higher than the reflux temperature of the solvent, and includes a reflux temperature to 250 ° C., preferably a reflux temperature to 200 ° C.
- R 10 is as defined above.
- R 17 is as defined above.
- R 18 is a protecting group for the carbonyl group, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, and an n-butyl group, and a methyl group or an ethyl group is preferable.
- Step 9-1 The compound (XXXIX) available from Chem Pacific or the like is reacted according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 version), and the compound (XXX) can get. Preferable examples include the method described in Reference Example 16.
- Step 9-2 By reacting compound (XXXX) according to a known method, for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition), a compound represented by general formula (XXXXI) is obtained. Obtainable.
- a preferable example is a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXI) by reacting the compound (XXXX) in an alcohol solvent with addition of an acid catalyst or thionyl chloride.
- the alcohol solvent may be selected from methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, n-butanol and the like according to the type of R 18 to be introduced.
- the acid catalyst include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, and trifluoroacetic acid.
- the amount of the acid catalyst used is 0.01 to 10 moles compared to the compound (XXXX). With respect to the use amount of thionyl chloride, it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to Compound (XXXX), and preferably 1 to 5 moles. With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be 0 ° C. to heating under reflux, and more preferably 40 ° C. to heating under reflux. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.1 to 48 hours. 1 to 24 hours is preferable.
- Step 9-3 When protection of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXI) is necessary, the above-mentioned hydroxyl-protecting group is selected, and a known method such as Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition) is used.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXII) can be obtained by carrying out a hydroxyl group protecting reaction according to the method described.
- a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXII) by adding a base in an inert solvent and reacting with a silylating agent in a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXI) can be mentioned.
- Examples of the inert solvent include N, N-dimethylformamide.
- Examples of the base include imidazole.
- Examples of the silylating agent include triethylchlorosilane and tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane.
- the silylating agent it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXI), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the base it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXI), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- Step 9-4 (STEP 9-4)
- the indazole protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXII) is required, the above indazole protecting group is selected, and known methods such as Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition)
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIII) is obtained by carrying out according to the method described in 1. above.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXIII) is reacted with a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXII) by adding a protecting reagent in an inert solvent and adding a base or an acid catalyst as necessary.
- the method of obtaining is mentioned.
- inert solvents examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane, halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane or 1,2-dichloroethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene, or xylene, or acetonitrile. These may be used alone or a mixed solvent thereof.
- the protective reagent include dihydropyran, chloromethyl methyl ether, and 2- (chloromethoxy) ethoxytrimethylsilane.
- Examples of the base include alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, or potassium t-butoxide, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1 Organic tertiary amines such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine.
- alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, or potassium t-butoxide, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1
- Organic tertiary amines such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine.
- Examples of the acid catalyst include hydrochloric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, and p-toluenesulfonyl acid.
- the protective reagent can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXII), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the base it can be 0 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXII), and preferably 0 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the catalyst it can be 0.001 to 1 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXII), and preferably 0.01 to 0.5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 100 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- Step 9-5 The compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIII) is converted into a general chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 26, pages 159 to 266, or a reference thereof.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXX) can be obtained.
- a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXX) by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIII) in an inert solvent by adding a reducing agent can be mentioned.
- the inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene, or xylene, and halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, chloroform, or 1,2-dichloroethane. Or a mixed solvent thereof.
- the reducing agent include lithium aluminum hydride, diisobutylaluminum hydride, lithium borohydride, sodium bis (2-methoxyethoxy) aluminum hydride, and the like.
- the use amount of the reducing agent it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXIII), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 50 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- G 1 , G 2 , G 3 , R 10 , R 12 and R 15 are as defined above.
- Step 10-1 The compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIV) is subjected to a deprotection reaction according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition).
- the compound shown by 1) can be produced.
- Preferable examples include performing the deprotection reaction under the above acidic conditions, or using the above deprotection reaction by hydrogenolysis alone or in combination.
- an appropriate deprotection reaction may be selected for various protecting groups present in the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIV).
- a compound represented by the general formula (A-1) can be obtained by adding an acid in an inert solvent for reaction.
- Examples of the inert solvent include ethyl acetate, 1,4-dioxane, and MTBE.
- Examples of the acid include hydrochloric acid-1,4-dioxane solution or hydrochloric acid-ethyl acetate solution.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to 60 ° C., and preferably 0 ° C. to 40 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 24 hours. 1 to 20 hours is preferable.
- Step 10-2 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIV) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXV) and the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI) by adding a base in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent examples include ketone-based organic solvents such as methyl isobutyl ketone, hydrocarbon-based solvents such as toluene, halogen-based hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, chloroform, or 1,2-dichloroethane, and acetonitrile. preferable.
- the base can be an organic tertiary amine such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, N, N-diisopropylethylamine, or triethylamine, or an organic base such as pyridine or 4-dimethylaminopyridine, or Examples thereof include inorganic bases such as potassium carbonate and sodium hydrogen carbonate, and pyridine or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene is preferable.
- organic tertiary amine such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, N, N-diisopropylethylamine, or triethylamine
- organic base such as pyridine or 4-dimethylaminopyridine
- examples thereof include inorganic bases such as potassium carbonate and sodium hydrogen carbonate, and pyridine or 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0]
- the amount of the base used is 1 to 10 times mol, preferably 1 to 5 times mol, of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXV). With respect to the use amount of the compound represented by the Formula (XXXXV), it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXVI), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 10 to 60 ° C., preferably ⁇ 10 to 30 ° C.
- reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.2 to 24 hours.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI) can also be obtained, for example, by the method described in Scheme 11.
- G 1 , G 3 , R 10 , R 12 and R 15 are as defined above, R 18 is the hydroxyl protecting group described above, and a benzyl group is preferred.
- Step 11-1 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIX) is obtained by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVII) with a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVIII) in an inert solvent.
- alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, or 2-propanol, or N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, or acetonitrile alone are used. These may be used or a mixed solvent thereof, but 2-propanol is preferred.
- a Lewis acid catalyst may be added.
- Step 11-2 (STEP 11-2) By carrying out the protection reaction of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXIX) according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition), etc. A compound represented by (XXXX) can be obtained.
- Preferable examples include a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXX) by adding a base to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXIX) in an inert solvent and reacting with a silylating agent.
- Examples of the inert solvent include N, N-dimethylformamide.
- Examples of the base include imidazole.
- Examples of the silylating agent include triethylchlorosilane and tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to 60 ° C., and preferably 0 ° C. to 30 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- Step 11-3 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXI) is obtained by adding the catalyst represented by the general formula (XXXXXX) in an inert solvent and reacting in the presence of hydrogen gas.
- the inert solvent examples include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, and 2-propanol, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether, or a mixed solvent thereof. Ethanol is preferred.
- the catalyst examples include palladium carbon powder, platinum oxide (PtO 2 ), activated nickel, and the like, and palladium carbon powder is preferable.
- the reaction temperature it can be 0 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 60 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- Step 11-4 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXI) is reacted with a compound represented by the general formula (XIII-I) by adding a phosphine and an azo compound in an inert solvent to react with the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI). A compound can be obtained.
- inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane, halogen solvents such as methylene chloride, or benzenes such as benzene, toluene, or xylene, and toluene or tetrahydrofuran is preferable.
- phosphines include triphenylphosphine or tributylphosphine, with triphenylphosphine being preferred.
- Examples of the azo compound include diethyl azodicarboxylate, diisopropyl azodicarboxylate, N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethylazodicarboxamide, or 1,1 ′-(azodicarbonyl) dipiperidine, N, N, N ′. , N′-tetraisopropylcarboxamide and the like, and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate or N, N, N ′, N′-tetramethylazodicarboxamide is preferable.
- the phosphine it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XIII-I), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the azo compound it can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XIII-I), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature is usually ⁇ 20 ° C.
- reaction time it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVII) can also be obtained, for example, by the method described in Scheme 12.
- Step 12-1 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIII) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXII) in an inert solvent by adding a halogenating agent and further adding methanol as necessary.
- inert solvent examples include halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, 1,2-dichloroethane, and chloroform, with dichloromethane being preferred.
- halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, 1,2-dichloroethane, and chloroform
- halogenating agent examples include chlorine gas, bromine gas, and sulfuryl chloride, and sulfuryl chloride is preferable.
- the amount of the halogenating agent used is preferably 1 to 3 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXII). With respect to the use amount of methanol, it can be 0 to 5 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXII), and preferably 0.1 to 3 moles.
- the reaction temperature is preferably ⁇ 10 ° C. to 50 ° C.
- the reaction time is preferably 1 to 10 hours including the dropping time of the halogenating agent and methanol.
- Step 12-2 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIV) is obtained by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIII) with a reducing agent in an organic solvent.
- organic solvent examples include alcohol solvents such as methanol or ethanol, or ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran.
- ether solvents such as tetrahydrofuran.
- reducing agent examples include sodium borohydride.
- a method for carrying out an asymmetric reduction reaction As a method for obtaining an optically active substance, a method for carrying out an asymmetric reduction reaction can be mentioned.
- the asymmetric reduction reaction is described in ordinary chemical literature, for example, the method described in the 5th edition Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 19, pages 65 to 171 or the reference thereof. It can be carried out according to the method.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIV) can be obtained by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIII) with an optically active ligand and a reducing agent in an inert solvent. .
- a halogen solvent such as dichloromethane
- a hydrocarbon solvent such as toluene
- an ether solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, or the like
- a mixed solvent of toluene and tetrahydrofuran is preferable.
- optically active ligands include (R) -2-methyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine and (R) -2-n-butyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine, but are available from Aldrich.
- a (R) -2-methyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine-toluene solution is preferred.
- the reducing agent include borane-tetrahydrofuran complex, borane-dimethyl sulfide complex, catechol borane and the like, but borane-dimethyl sulfide complex is preferable.
- the amount of the optically active ligand used is preferably 0.05 to 1 times the molar amount of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIII).
- the amount of the reducing agent used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the general formula (XXXXIII).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 78 to 50 ° C., preferably ⁇ 10 to 30 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 12 hours. 1 to 12 hours is preferable.
- Step 12-3 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVII) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIV) by adding a base in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent examples include water, alcohol solvents such as methanol, 2-propanol, and ethanol, or N, N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, 1,4-dioxane, acetone, 2-butanone, dimethyl sulfoxide, or acetonitrile. These may be used alone or a mixed solvent thereof, and 2-propanol is preferred.
- Bases include alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, 28% sodium methoxide-methanol solution, or potassium t-butoxide, or Examples thereof include organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, and triethylamine, and sodium hydroxide is preferable.
- alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, 28% sodium methoxide-methanol solution, or potassium t-butoxide
- organic tertiary amines such as pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, and
- the amount of the base used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the general formula (XXXXIV). With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be ⁇ 40 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably ⁇ 10 to 50 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI) can also be obtained, for example, by the method described in Scheme 13.
- Step 13-1 The compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVII) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVII) and the compound represented by the general formula (XIX-I) in an inert solvent.
- alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, or 2-propanol, or N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, or acetonitrile alone are used. These may be used or a mixed solvent thereof, but 2-propanol is preferred.
- Step 13-2 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI) is obtained by adding a catalyst to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXXV) in an inert solvent and reacting in the presence of hydrogen gas.
- the inert solvent examples include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, and 2-propanol, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether, or a mixed solvent thereof. , Ethanol, or a tetrahydrofuran-methanol mixed solvent is preferable.
- the catalyst is palladium carbon powder, platinum oxide (PtO 2 ), N.P. E. Examples thereof include CM-101 catalyst available from Chemcat, etc., or activated nickel. Palladium carbon powder or CM-101 catalyst is preferred. With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be 0 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 60 ° C.
- the reaction time is 0.5 hours to 3 days, preferably 1 hour to 3 days.
- Step 13-3 (STEP 13-3) By performing the protection reaction of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI) according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition), the general formula A compound represented by (XXXXVI) can be obtained.
- a preferable example is a method of obtaining a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI) by adding a base to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVI) in an inert solvent and reacting with a silylating agent.
- Examples of the inert solvent include N, N-dimethylformamide.
- Examples of the base include imidazole.
- Examples of the silylating agent include triethylchlorosilane and tert-butyldimethylchlorosilane.
- reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to 60 ° C., and preferably 0 ° C. to 30 ° C.
- reaction time it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XIII-I) can also be obtained, for example, by the method described in Scheme 14.
- G 1 is —OCHF 2 group or —OCF 3 group
- R 10 and R 17 are as defined above.
- Step 14-1 (STEP 14-1)
- a known method for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 version), etc.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVIII) is obtained.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVIII) is obtained by reacting the compound (XXXXVII) with a benzylating reagent and a base in an inert solvent.
- inert solvent examples include ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether, and inert solvents such as N, N-dimethylformamide, or a mixed solvent thereof. Is preferred.
- benzylating agent examples include benzyl chloride and benzyl bromide, and benzyl bromide is preferred.
- Examples of the base include potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, potassium t-butoxide, and other inorganic bases, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1, Examples thereof include organic amines such as 8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine and triethylamine, and potassium carbonate is preferred.
- the amount of the base used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound (XXXXVII).
- the benzylating agent is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to Compound (XXXXVII).
- the reaction temperature may be ⁇ 20 to heating under reflux, preferably 0 ° C. to 70 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.1 to 48 hours. 1 to 24 hours is preferable.
- Step 14-2 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXIX) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVIII) with an hydrazine and optionally a base in an inert solvent.
- the inert solvent examples include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol and 2-butanol, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dimethoxyethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene and xylene are used alone, or these 1-butanol is preferable.
- hydrazines include hydrazine monohydrate, hydrazine monohydrochloride, hydrazine dihydrochloride, and hydrazine monohydrate, and hydrazine monohydrate is preferable.
- the base include inorganic bases such as sodium acetate, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, and sodium bicarbonate.
- the hydrazines are exemplified by 1 to 20 times by mole, more preferably 1 to 15 times by mole with respect to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXVIII).
- the reaction temperature it can be 0 ° C. to heating under reflux. Further, by reacting in a microwave sealed reaction vessel, the reaction temperature can exceed the reflux temperature of the solvent, and in this case, 100 ° C. to 200 ° C. is preferable.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- Step 14-3 When an amine protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXIX) is necessary, it should be carried out according to a known method, for example, the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition). Thus, a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXX) is obtained. As a preferable example, a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXX) is obtained by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXIX) in an inert solvent by adding Boc 2 O, a base, and, if necessary, a catalyst. It is done.
- inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran and dimethoxyethane, halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane and 1,2-dichloroethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene and xylene, and inert solvents such as acetonitrile. May be used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof may be mentioned, and dichloromethane is preferred.
- ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran and dimethoxyethane
- halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane and 1,2-dichloroethane
- benzenes such as benzene, toluene and xylene
- inert solvents such as acetonitrile. May be used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof may be mentioned, and dichloromethane is preferred.
- Examples of the base include an inorganic base such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, or potassium t-butoxide, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1, Examples include organic tertiary amines such as 8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine, with triethylamine being preferred. Examples of the catalyst include 4-N, N-dimethylaminopyridine.
- Boc 2 O is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIX).
- the base is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXIX).
- the catalyst is preferably 0.001 to 1 mole per mole of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXIX).
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 to 100 ° C., and preferably 0 ° C. to 50 ° C.
- reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- Step 14-4 The compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXX) is described in ordinary chemical literature, for example, the method described in Organo Fluorine Chemistry (authored by Kenji Unayayama, published by Blackwell), pages 257-292 or 310, or references described in this document
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXI) can be obtained.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXX) is obtained by reacting a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXX) with a difluoromethylation reagent and a base in an inert solvent.
- water or an aprotic polar solvent such as N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or acetonitrile is used alone, or these A mixed solvent may be mentioned, and N, N-dimethylformamide is preferred.
- Difluoromethylation reagents include chlorodifluoromethane, sodium chlorodifluoroacetate, chlorodifluoroacetic acid-tert-butyl ester, 2-chloro-2,2-difluoroacetophenone, 2,2-difluoro-2- (fluorosulfonyl) acetic acid, Examples include methyl chlorodifluoroacetate, and sodium chlorodifluoroacetate is preferred.
- the base examples include inorganic bases, alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, potassium t-butoxide, and potassium carbonate is preferable.
- the difluoromethylation reagent is used in an amount of 1 to 20 times mol, preferably 1 to 10 times mol, of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXX).
- the base is used in an amount of 1 to 20 moles compared to the compounds represented by the general formula (XXXXXX), and preferably 1 to 10 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be 25 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 25 to 100 ° C.
- With respect to the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- Step 14-5 When it is necessary to remove the protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXI), it is performed according to a known method, for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition). Thus, a compound represented by the general formula (XIII-I) is obtained.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XIII-I) is obtained by adding the catalyst represented by the general formula (XXXXXXI) in an inert solvent and reacting in the presence of hydrogen gas.
- the inert solvent examples include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol or 2-propanol, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether, or a mixed solvent thereof. Tetrahydrofuran is preferred.
- the catalyst include palladium carbon powder. With respect to the reaction temperature, it can be 0 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 60 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XIII-I) can also be obtained, for example, by the method described in Scheme 15.
- G 1 is a halogen atom
- R 10 and R 17 are as defined above.
- Step 15-1 Compounds (XXXXXXXII) available from Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. are described in ordinary chemical literature, for example, 4th edition, Experimental Chemistry Course (edited by the Chemical Society of Japan, published by Maruzen Co., Ltd.), Volume 20, pages 112-114.
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXIII) is obtained by carrying out according to the method or the method described in the references described in this document.
- compound (XXXXXXXII) is reacted with a diazonium reagent or a nitrosation reagent and an acid in an inert solvent, and then reacted with acetic acid and the like after passing through the diazonium salt of compound (XXXXXXII).
- the method of obtaining the compound shown by general formula (XXXXXXXIII) by this is mentioned.
- the inert solvent water or the like is preferable.
- the diazonium reagent or nitrosator reagent include sodium nitrite, tertbutyl nitrite, and isoamyl nitrite, and sodium nitrite is preferred.
- the acid include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, and tetrafluoroboric acid, and tetrafluoroboric acid is preferable.
- the amount of the diazonium reagent or nitrosator reagent used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound (XXXXXXII).
- the amount of the acid used is preferably 1 to a large excess mole relative to the compound (XXXXXXII).
- the reaction temperature is preferably ⁇ 20 to 100 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- R 17 is a hydrogen atom
- the hydroxyl group can be protected.
- the protection reaction may be performed according to a known method, for example, a method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition).
- Step 15-2 A compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXIV) is obtained by reacting the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXIII) in an inert solvent by adding a halogenating reagent and adding a base as necessary.
- the inert solvent examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane, halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane, chloroform, or 1,2-dichloroethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene, or xylene, or acetonitrile.
- Etc. are used alone, or a mixed solvent thereof can be mentioned, and tetrahydrofuran or acetonitrile is preferable.
- halogenating reagent examples include chlorine gas, bromine, iodine, N-bromosuccinimide, N-chlorosuccinimide, and N-iodosuccinimide, and N-chlorosuccinimide is preferable.
- Examples of the base include alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, or potassium t-butoxide, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1 Organic tertiary amines such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine, and potassium t-butoxide is preferred.
- alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, or potassium t-butoxide, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1
- Organic tertiary amines such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine, and potassium t-butoxide is preferred.
- the amount of the halogenating reagent used is preferably 1 to 10 moles compared to the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXIII).
- the use amount of the base it can be 0 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXXXIII), and preferably 0 to 5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to heating under reflux.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 24 hours, and preferably 0.1 to 12 hours.
- Step 15-3 When the indazole protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXIV) is required, the above indazole protecting group is selected, and a known method such as Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, published by John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition).
- the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXXV) can be obtained by carrying out according to the method described in 1.
- a compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXXV) is reacted with a protective reagent in an inert solvent and, if necessary, a base or a catalyst added to react with the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXXV). The method of obtaining is mentioned.
- inert solvents examples include ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, or dimethoxyethane, halogenated hydrocarbons such as dichloromethane or 1,2-dichloroethane, benzenes such as benzene, toluene, or xylene, or acetonitrile. These may be used alone or a mixed solvent thereof.
- the protecting reagent include dihydropyran or di-tert-butyl carbonate.
- Examples of the base include alkali metal compounds such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, sodium methoxide, or potassium t-butoxide, or pyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, 1 Organic tertiary amines such as 1,8-diazabicyclo [5,4,0] -undecene, trimethylamine, or triethylamine.
- an acid catalyst or a base catalyst may be properly used depending on the protection reaction.
- Examples of the acid catalyst include hydrochloric acid and p-toluenesulfonyl acid.
- Examples of the base catalyst include 4-dimethylaminopyridine.
- the protective reagent can be 1 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXXXIV), and preferably 1 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the base it can be 0 to 10 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXXXIV), and preferably 0 to 5 moles.
- the use amount of the catalyst it can be 0.001 to 1 moles compared to the compounds represented by the Formula (XXXXXXIV), and preferably 0.01 to 0.5 moles.
- the reaction temperature it can be ⁇ 20 ° C. to heating under reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 100 ° C.
- the reaction time it can be 0.1 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- Step 15-4 When removal of the protecting group of the compound represented by the general formula (XXXXXXV) is necessary, it is carried out according to a known method such as the method described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (2007 edition). Thus, a compound represented by the general formula (XIII-I) is obtained. As a preferable example, the compound represented by the general formula (XIII-I) is obtained by performing the deprotection reaction of the silyl group described above in an inert solvent.
- the reaction temperature is 0 ° C. to heating reflux, and preferably 0 ° C. to 60 ° C. With respect to the reaction time, it can be 0.5 to 48 hours, and preferably 1 to 24 hours.
- each raw material compound, and their intermediates can be isolated and purified according to conventional methods such as extraction, distillation, chromatography, recrystallization and the like.
- a portion corresponding to the asymmetric carbon is commercially available (or known in the art).
- a method using a raw material compound which can be prepared according to a method or a known method There is also a method for separating the compound of the present invention or a precursor thereof as an optically active isomer by a conventional method.
- the method for example, by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using an optically active column, a salt is formed with an optically active reagent and separated using fractional crystallization, and then the formation of the salt is released.
- HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
- optical fractional crystallization method There are a classical optical fractional crystallization method and a method in which a diastereomer formed by condensation with an optically active reagent is separated and purified and then decomposed again.
- the precursor is separated into an optically active substance
- the optically active compound of the present invention can be produced by carrying out the production method shown above.
- the compound of the present invention is useful as a medicine with no toxicity observed, and has, for example, ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonist activity, so that it can be used as a medicine for treatment and prevention of ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor related diseases.
- ⁇ 3-adrenergic receptor-related diseases are a general term for diseases that can be ameliorated by agonistic activity mediated by this receptor. For example, overactive bladder, urinary incontinence, interstitial cystitis, diabetes, obesity, hyperlipidemia , Fatty liver, digestive system diseases (preferably abnormal movement or ulcers of the digestive system), depression, diseases caused by gallstones, increased biliary motility, or diseases associated with a decrease in tears.
- the medicament of the present invention for the treatment and / or prevention of overactive bladder or urinary incontinence, and it is particularly preferable to use the medicament of the present invention for the treatment of overactive bladder.
- the medicament of the present invention is used for the treatment of urinary incontinence.
- the definition of overactive bladder is that “the urinary urgency is the main symptom, usually with frequent urination or nocturia, regardless of urinary incontinence” .
- the definition of urinary incontinence is "Involuntary urinary leakage that can be objectively proved, causing problems in daily life and hygiene.”
- the compound of the present invention is useful as a ⁇ 3 / ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor selective agonist.
- the compound of the present invention does not substantially activate the ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor in the patient when the compound is administered to a patient intended to activate the ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor.
- Intrinsic Activity i.e. I.V. A. (%)
- Ratio i.e. I.V. A. (%)
- I.D. A. 0.5 or less
- I.D. A. Even more preferred are compounds having a ratio of 0.15 or less.
- the above-mentioned I.I. A The ratio is 0.8 or less, and the EC50 ratio, that is, the value obtained by dividing the EC50 for the ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor by the EC50 for the ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor is 5 times or more.
- the above-mentioned I.I. A. The ratio is 0.5 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 5 times or more.
- the ratio is 0.3 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 5 times or more.
- the ratio is 0.15 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 5 times or more.
- the above-mentioned I.I. A The ratio is 0.8 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 10 times or more. In another preferred embodiment, the above-mentioned I.I. A. The ratio is 0.5 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 10 times or more. In another preferred embodiment, the above-mentioned I.I. A. The ratio is 0.3 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 10 times or more. In another preferred embodiment, the above-mentioned I.I. A. The ratio is 0.15 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 10 times or more.
- the above-mentioned I.I. A The ratio is 0.8 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 15 times or more. In another preferred embodiment, the above-mentioned I.I. A. The ratio is 0.5 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 15 times or more. In another preferred embodiment, the above-mentioned I.I. A. The ratio is 0.3 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 15 times or more. In another preferred embodiment, the above-mentioned I.I. A. The ratio is 0.15 or less, and the EC50 ratio is 15 times or more.
- substantially does not activate the ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor means that the compound is 55% or less, preferably 45% or less, more preferably 35% or less of the ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor in [Test Example 4] described later. % Or less, more preferably 25% or less, particularly preferably 15% or less, and even more preferably 5% or less.
- the compound of the present invention is excellent in safety (various toxicities and safety pharmacology), pharmacokinetic performance and the like, and its usefulness as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed.
- Examples of safety-related tests include those listed below, but are not limited to this example. Cytotoxicity tests (such as tests using HL60 cells and hepatocytes), genotoxicity tests (Ames test, mouse lymphoma TK test, chromosome abnormality test, micronucleus test, etc.), skin sensitization tests (Buhler method, GPMT method) , APT method, LLNA test, etc.), skin photosensitization test (Adjuvant and Strip method, etc.), eye irritation test (single eye drop, short-term continuous eye drop, repeated eye drop etc.), safety pharmacology test for cardiovascular system ( Measurement of ECG heart rate and blood pressure by telemetry method, APD method, hERG inhibition evaluation method, etc.) Safety pharmacology test for central nervous system (FOB method, Irwin method, etc.), Safety pharmacology test for respiratory system (respiratory function) Measurement method (plethysmography method), measurement method using blood gas analyzer, etc.), general toxicity
- examples of the pharmacokinetic performance test include those listed below, but are not limited to this example. Cytochrome P450 enzyme inhibition or induction test, cell permeability test (test using CaCO-2 cells, MDCK cells, etc.), drug transporter ATPase assay, oral absorption test, blood concentration transition test, metabolic test (stable Test, metabolic molecular species test, reactivity test, etc.), solubility test (solubility test by turbidity method, etc.)
- Cytotoxicity tests include methods using various cultured cells such as HL-60 cells which are human pre-leukemia cells, primary isolated cultured cells of liver cells, and neutrophil fractions prepared from human peripheral blood. This test can be carried out by the method described below, but is not limited to this description.
- Cells are prepared as a cell suspension of 10 6 to 10 7 cells / ml, and 0.01 mL to 1 mL of the suspension is dispensed into a microtube or a microplate. A solution in which the test compound is dissolved is added from 1/100 to 1 times the cell suspension, and cultured at 37 ° C.
- the cell viability is evaluated using the MTT method or the WST-1 method (Ishiyama, M. et al., In Vitro Toxology, 8, p. 187, 1995). By measuring the cytotoxicity of the compound of the present invention against cells, its usefulness as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed.
- Genotoxicity tests include the Ames test, mouse lymphoma TK test, chromosome aberration test and micronucleus test.
- the Ames test is a method for determining a reversion mutation suddenly by culturing bacteria on a culture dish or the like mixed with a test compound using Salmonella or Escherichia coli of a designated bacterial species (1999 Pharmaceutical Sciences 1604). No. “Genotoxicity Test Guidelines” II-1.
- mouse lymphoma TK test is a gene mutation ability detection test targeting the thymidine kinase gene of mouse lymphoid L5178Y cells (1999, Medicinal Examination No. 1604, “Genotoxicity Test Guidelines” II-3.
- Former TK test Clive, D. et al., Mutat. Res., 31, pp. 17-29, 1975; Cole, J. et al., Mutat. Res., 111, pp. 371-386, 1983) It is.
- Chromosome abnormality test is a method of determining the activity that causes chromosomal abnormalities by co-culturing mammalian cultured cells and test compounds, then immobilizing the cells, and chromosomal staining and observation (1999 Pharmaceutical Review). No. 1604 “Genotoxicity Test Guidelines” II-2 Chromosome aberration test using cultured mammalian cells). Furthermore, the micronucleus test is an assessment of micronucleus formation ability caused by chromosomal abnormalities. A method using rodents (in vivo test) (1999 Medicinal Examination No. 1604, "Genotoxicity Test Guidelines" II -4. Micronucleus test using rodents: Hayashi, M.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a skin sensitization test.
- a skin sensitization test as a skin sensitization test using guinea pigs, the Buehler method (Buehler, EV, Arch. Dermatol., 91, pp. 171-177, 1965), the GPMT method (maximization) Method (Magnusson, B. et al., J. Invest. Dermatol., 52, pp. 268-276, 1969)) or APT method (adjuvant & patch method (Sato, Y. et al., Contact Dermatitis, 7, pp.225-237, 1981)).
- the LLNA (Local Lymph node assay) method OECD Guideline for the testing of chemicals 429, skin sensitization 2002, Takeo, L. et al. 3), pp. 203-8, 2001; Takeyoshi, M. et al., J. Appl. Toxicol., 25 (2), pp. 129-34, 2005.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a skin photosensitization test.
- the skin photosensitization test includes a skin photosensitization test using guinea pigs (“Pharmaceuticals, Non-clinical Test Guidelines, 2002”, Yakuji Nippo, 2002, 1-9: Skin Photosensitization Test).
- guinea pigs Pulmaceuticals, Non-clinical Test Guidelines, 2002”, Yakuji Nippo, 2002, 1-9: Skin Photosensitization Test.
- Adjuvant and Strip method As an Adjuvant and Strip method (Ichikawa, H. et al., J. Invest. Dermatol., 76, pp. 498-501, 1981), Harber method (Haber, LC, Arch. Dermatol., 96, pp. 646-653, 1967), horio method (Horio, T., J.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting an eye irritation test.
- the eye irritation test includes single eye drop test methods using rabbit eyes, monkey eyes, etc., short-term continuous eye drop test methods (instillation at regular intervals multiple times) and repeated eye drop test methods ( The eye irritation symptoms for a certain period of time after instillation are improved dray score (Fukui, N. et al., Gendai no Rinsho, 4 (7), pp. 277-289, 1970). By using any one or two or more of these methods to clarify the eye irritation of the compound of the present invention, the usefulness as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a safety pharmacological test for the cardiovascular system.
- a safety pharmacological test for the cardiovascular system telemetry (method for measuring the effects of test compound administration without anesthesia on electrocardiogram, heart rate, blood pressure, blood flow, etc. (Shigeru Kanno, Hirokazu Tsuji, Yoshiyoshi Nakata) IV, electrocardiogram, echocardiogram, blood pressure, pathology examination of animals for basic and clinical purposes (2003 Maruzen Co., Ltd.)), APD method (method for measuring duration of action potential of myocardial cells (Muraki, K. et al) , AM J.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a safety pharmacological test for the central nervous system.
- the FOB method (Mattson, JL et al., J. American College of Technology, 15 (3), pp. 239-254, 1996) ), Irwin's modified methods (methods for evaluating general symptoms and behavioral observation (Irwin, S., Comprehensive Observative Assessment (Bell.) 13, pp. 222-257, 1968), etc.) Any one of these or
- the usefulness as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a safety pharmacological test for the respiratory system.
- a safety pharmacology test for the respiratory system a measurement method using a respiratory function measuring device (measures respiratory rate, tidal volume, minute ventilation, etc.) (Dorbaugh, JE et al., Pediatrics, 16, pp. 81-87, 1955; Epstein, MA et al., Respir. Physiol., 32, pp. 105-120, 1978) and blood gas analyzers (blood gas, hemoglobin oxygen saturation, etc.) Measurement) (Matsuo, S., Medicina, 40, pp. 188-, 2003).
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a general toxicity test.
- General toxicity test is a single or repeated (multiple days) oral administration of a test compound dissolved or suspended in an appropriate solvent using rodents such as rats and mice, or non-rodents such as monkeys and dogs. Or it is the method of evaluating the general state of a administered animal, clinical chemistry change, a pathological tissue change, etc. by administering intravenously. By using these methods and clarifying the general toxicity of the compounds of the present invention, their usefulness as active pharmaceutical ingredients can be confirmed.
- Reproductive and developmental toxicity test is a study that examines the induction of adverse effects in the reproductive development process of test compounds using rodents such as rats and mice, or non-rodents such as monkeys and dogs (“Pharmaceuticals Non-clinical Study Guidelines, 2002” “Please refer to Yakuji Nippo, 2002, 1-6: Reproductive and Developmental Toxicity Test.)
- Reproductive and developmental toxicity tests include fertility and early embryonic development up to implantation, prenatal and postnatal development, maternal function, and embryo / fetal development (2000, Pharmaceutical Examined No.
- the usefulness of the compounds of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient is, for example, the inhibition or induction test of cytochrome P450 enzyme (Gomez-Lehon, MJ et al., Curr. Drug Metab. 5 (5), pp. 443-462, 2004).
- cytochrome P450 enzyme Gomez-Lehon, MJ et al., Curr. Drug Metab. 5 (5), pp. 443-462, 2004.
- a method for measuring whether the test compound inhibits the enzyme activity in vitro Miller , V.P. et al., Ann.N.Y.Acad.Sci., 919, pp.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a cell permeability test.
- Method for measuring cell membrane permeability of test compound in cell culture system in vitro using CaCO-2 cells Yamashita, S. et al., Eur. J. Pham. Sci., 10, pp. 195-204, 2000; Ingels, FM et al., J. Pham. Sci., 92, pp.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed, for example, by performing a drug transporter ATPase assay as an ATP-Binding Cassette (ABC) transporter.
- a drug transporter transporter ATPase assay a method for examining whether or not a test compound is a substrate of P-gp using a P-glycoprotein (P-gp) baculovirus expression system (German, UA, Methods Enzymol. 292, pp. 427-41, 1998). Further, for example, it can be confirmed by conducting a transport test using an oocyte collected from Xenopus laevis as a single carrier transporter (SLC) transporter.
- SLC single carrier transporter
- Examples of the transport test include a method of examining whether or not a test compound is a substrate of OATP2 using OATP2 expression Ocytes (Tamai I. et. Al., Pharm Res. 2001 Sep; 18 (9): 1262-1269). It is done. By using these methods and clarifying the action of the compound of the present invention on ABC transporter or SLC transporter, the usefulness as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting an oral absorption test.
- oral absorption tests rodents, monkeys, dogs, etc. are used. A certain amount of test compound is dissolved or suspended in an appropriate solvent, and the blood concentration after oral administration is measured over time.
- There is a method of evaluating blood translocation by oral administration using LC-MS / MS method (edited by Kenichi Harada et al. “Latest Mass Spectrometry for Life Sciences”, Kodansha Scientific 2002). By using these methods to clarify the oral absorbability of the compound of the present invention, the usefulness as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a blood concentration transition measurement test.
- the transition of the concentration of the test compound in the blood after administration of the test compound to rodents, monkeys, dogs, etc. was determined by the LC-MS / MS method ("Life” edited by Kenichi Harada et al. The latest mass spectrometry for science "(Kodansha Scientific 2002)) can be used.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed by clarifying the change in blood concentration of the compound of the present invention.
- Metabolic tests include a blood stability test method (a method for predicting in vivo metabolic clearance from the metabolic rate of a test compound in liver microsomes of humans or other animal species (Shou, WZ et al. , J. Mass Spectrom., 40 (10), pp. 1347-1356, 2005; Li, C. et al., Drug Metab. Dispos., 34 (6), 901-905, 2006)), metabolic molecular species test And reactive metabolite test methods. By using any one or two or more of these methods and clarifying the metabolic profile of the compound of the present invention, its usefulness as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed.
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active pharmaceutical ingredient can be confirmed, for example, by conducting a solubility test.
- a solubility test a turbidity method (Lipinski, CA et al., Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev., 23, pp. 3-26, 1997; Bevan, CD et al. Chem., 72, pp. 1781-1787, 2000).
- the usefulness of the compound of the present invention as an active ingredient of a medicine can be confirmed by examining, for example, upper gastrointestinal tract disorder, renal dysfunction and the like.
- a pharmacological test for the upper gastrointestinal tract the action on the gastric mucosa can be examined using a fasted rat gastric mucosa injury model.
- Examples of the pharmacological test for renal function include a method for measuring renal blood flow and glomerular filtration rate [Physiology, 18th edition (Kododou), 1986, Chapter 17].
- the medicament of the present invention When the medicament of the present invention is administered to humans, it can be orally administered in the form of tablets, powders, granules, capsules, dragees, solutions, syrups, etc., or injections, drops, suppositories, transdermal Alternatively, parenteral administration in the form of an absorbent or the like is also possible. In addition, inhalation in the form of a spray such as aerosol or dry powder is also a preferred dosage form.
- the administration period of the medicament of the present invention is not particularly limited, but when it is administered for therapeutic purposes, the period during which clinical symptoms of each disease are judged to be expressed can be selected as the administration period in principle. Usually, the administration is generally continued for several weeks to one year, but can be further continued depending on the disease state, or can be continued after the recovery of clinical symptoms. Furthermore, even if no clinical symptoms are manifested, it can be administered prophylactically at the discretion of the clinician.
- the dose of the medicament of the present invention is not particularly limited, but for example, generally 0.01 to 2000 mg of an active ingredient per day for an adult can be administered in one to several divided doses.
- the frequency of administration can be from once a month to every day, preferably once / week to 3 times / week, or 5 times / week, or daily.
- the daily dose, administration period, and administration frequency may be appropriately increased or decreased depending on the patient's age, weight, physical health, disease to be treated and its severity.
- the medicament of the present invention can be administered together with preventive or therapeutic agents for various abnormalities and diseases other than the purpose of prevention and / or treatment of the medicament of the present invention.
- a multiprep YFLC (manufactured by Yamazen Co., Ltd.) was used for what is described as “COLUMN-A”, and a Hi-Flash TM Column-Silicagel series manufactured by the same company was used as the column.
- a multiprep YFLC (manufactured by Yamazen Co., Ltd.) was used for what is described as “COLUMN-B”, and a PurifPack-Si series manufactured by MORITEX was used as the column.
- a 2-channel parallel purification apparatus “Purif- ⁇ 2 (50F)” manufactured by MORITEX was used, and the column used was the PurifPack-Si series manufactured by the same company.
- LCMS liquid chromatography mass spectrometry spectrum
- A those described as “LCMS-A” are shown below (LCMS-A), and those described as “LCMS conditions; B” are shown below (LCMS-B) and “LCMS conditions;
- C the measurement was performed under the conditions described in the following (LCMS-C), or for those described as “LCMS conditions; D” as described in the following (LCMS-D).
- LCMS-A A Platform-LC type mass spectrometer (manufactured by Micromass) was used as a mass spectrometer, and measurement was performed by an electrospray (ESI) method.
- ESI electrospray
- As the liquid chromatograph an apparatus manufactured by GILSON was used.
- As a separation column Develosil C30-UG-5 (50 ⁇ 4.6 mm) (manufactured by Nomura Chemical Co., Ltd.) was used.
- the liquid B was linearly gradient from 5 to 98% (v / v) from 0 minutes to 4 minutes, and then measured under conditions where the liquid B was eluted at 98% until 6 minutes.
- LCMS-B A Platform-LC type mass spectrometer (manufactured by Micromass) was used as a mass spectrometer, and measurement was performed by an electrospray (ESI) method. As the liquid chromatograph, an apparatus manufactured by GILSON was used.
- LCMS-C A single quadrupole mass spectrometer (UPLC / SQD system [manufactured by Waters)] was used as a mass spectrometer, and measurement was performed by an electrospray (ESI) method.
- the liquid chromatograph used was Waters Acquity Ultra Performance LC system.
- ACQUITY UPLC BEH C18 2.1 ⁇ 50 mm 1.7 ⁇ m was used.
- the measurement was performed under the condition of eluting the solution B at 5% from 6 minutes to 2.8 minutes.
- LCMS-D Measurement was performed by an electrospray (ESI) method using a single quadrupole mass spectrometer; UPLC / SQD system (manufactured by Waters) as a mass spectrometer.
- the liquid chromatograph used was Waters Acquity Ultra Performance LC system.
- ACQUITY UPLC BEH C18 2.1 ⁇ 50 mm 1.7 ⁇ m was used.
- the column is lonPac AS14 (Nippon Dionex), the mobile phase is a flow rate of 1.2 mL / min, 1.0 mmol / L carbonate containing 3.5 mmol / L sodium carbonate.
- An aqueous sodium hydride solution was used, the column temperature was 30 ° C., and an electric conductivity detector was used as the detector.
- an anion mixed standard solution anion mixed standard solution IV (manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) was used.
- the column uses lonPac CS14 (Nippon Dionex), the mobile phase uses a flow rate of 1.0 mL / min, 10 mmol / L methanesulfonic acid aqueous solution, the column temperature is 30 ° C., and the detector is electrically conductive. A degree detector was used.
- the standard solution cation mixed standard solution anion mixed standard solution II (manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) was used.
- 2-Fluoro-4-hydroxybenzonitrile (30.1 g; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and imidazole (18.3 g; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) are dissolved in dehydrated DMF (436 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) and cooled to 0 ° C. Thereafter, TBDMSCl (48.3 g; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was added and stirred for 1 hour while raising the temperature to room temperature. The reaction mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure, water was added, and the mixture was extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
- reaction solution was cooled to 0 ° C., water (50 mL), 5 mol / L hydrochloric acid (50 mL) were added, and the mixture was stirred overnight under heating to reflux, then the reaction solution was cooled to room temperature and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water and saturated brine, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in dehydrated THF (100 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), 1 mol / L-TBAF-THF solution (31.5 mL; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes.
- dehydrated THF 100 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
- 1 mol / L-TBAF-THF solution 31.5 mL; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
- 3-Cyclopropylindazol-6-ol hydrochloride (5.18 g) and imidazole (4.21 g; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 4 and the like, are dehydrated DMF (122 mL; Kanto Chemical).
- TBDPSCl (15.67 mL; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was added and stirred at 20 ° C. overnight.
- Imidazole (1.8 g; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and TBDPSCl (6.27 mL; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) were added to the reaction solution, and the mixture was stirred at 20 ° C. for 2 hours.
- dehydrated THF 113 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
- Triethylamine 1.905 mL; manufactured by Kokusan Chemical Co., Ltd.
- DMAP 0.721 g; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.
- Boc 2 O 3.14 mL
- reaction solution was irradiated with ultrasonic waves, 4 mol / L-hydrogen chloride-1,4-dioxane solution (14 mL; manufactured by Kokusan Chemical Co., Ltd.) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours.
- the precipitate was filtered, and the resulting solid was dissolved in water (20 mL).
- water 85 mL was added and dissolved, and then the solvent was repeated three times under reduced pressure. Water (80 mL) was added to the resulting residue.
- the residue was freeze-dried to obtain the title compound as a hydrochloride (2.033 g).
- Dehydrated diethyl ether (10 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) was added to the reaction solution, and bromocyclobutane (6.974 mL) dissolved in dehydrated diethyl ether (50 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) was added dropwise. After completion of dropping, the solution was stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. A part of the concentration was withdrawn and titrated with 0.1 mol / L hydrochloric acid to determine 0.78 mol / L. ] Was added dropwise. After completion of the dropwise addition, the reaction solution was stirred at room temperature for 15 minutes, copper bromide (95.4 mg) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 0.5 hour under heating to reflux.
- reaction solution was cooled to 0 ° C., water (30 mL), 5 mol / L hydrochloric acid (30 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour under reflux with heating.
- the reaction solution was cooled to room temperature and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water and saturated brine, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in dehydrated THF (76 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), 1 mol / L-TBAF-THF solution (38 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 minutes.
- Cyclobutyl (2-fluoro-4-hydroxyphenyl) methanone (6.967 g), sodium acetate (14.16 g; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), benzylhydrazine-dihydrochloric acid, which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 9
- the salt (10.55 g; manufactured by Aldrich) was suspended in xylene (85 mL; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and stirred overnight using a Dean-Stark apparatus under heating and reflux.
- the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, the precipitate was filtered, and the resulting solid was dissolved in water and ethyl acetate.
- the aqueous layer was extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
- 3-Cyclobutylindazol-6-ol hydrochloride (6.45 g) and imidazole (5.039 g) that can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 11 are dissolved in DMF (100 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.). , TBDPSCl (18.44 mL) was added and stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was added to water and extracted twice with ethyl acetate, and the organic layer was washed twice with water and once with saturated brine.
- reaction solution was irradiated with ultrasonic waves, 4 mol / L-hydrogen chloride-ethyl acetate solution (5 mL; manufactured by Kokusan Chemical Co., Ltd.) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The precipitate was filtered to give the title compound as hydrochloride (2.1659 g).
- 6-Methoxyindazole-3-carboxylic acid (1.015 g; manufactured by Chem Pacific) was dissolved in hydrobromic acid (52 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) and stirred overnight under heating and reflux. After cooling to room temperature, disappearance of the raw materials and confirmation of the title compound were performed using LCMS, and the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure to obtain a crude product of the title compound (1.504 g).
- LCMS 179.1 [M + H]; Retention time: 1.94 minutes; LCMS conditions: A
- Ethyl 6-hydroxyindazole-3-carboxylate (1.457 g) that can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 17 is dissolved in dehydrated DMF (15.6 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), and imidazole (1.425 g Manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and TBDPSCl (4.06 mL) were added and stirred overnight at room temperature.
- the reaction solution was poured into a saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution and extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with saturated brine, and the insoluble material was filtered off using celite.
- Ethyl 6-tert-butyldiphenylsilyloxyindazole-3-carboxylate (1.461 g), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 18 or the like, is dissolved in toluene (16.5 mL; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 3,4-Dihydro-2H-pyran (0.6 mL; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (0.1293 g) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 60 ° C. overnight under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction solution was poured into a saturated aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate solution and extracted once with ethyl acetate.
- Ethyl 6- (tert-butyldiphenylsilyloxy) -1- (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl) -indazole-3-carboxylate (1.299 g) which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 19 ) was dissolved in dehydrated THF (12.3 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), 1 mol / L-TBAF-THF solution (3.69 mL; manufactured by Aldrich) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours under a nitrogen atmosphere. Ethyl acetate was added to the reaction solution, washed three times with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure.
- Ethyl 6-hydroxy-1- (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl) -indazole-3-carboxylate (148 mg), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 20 or the like, was added to dehydrated DMF (5.2 mL; Dissolved in Kanto Chemical Co., Inc., potassium carbonate (227 mg; manufactured by Aldrich) and benzyl bromide (73.6 ⁇ L; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 60 ° C. overnight. The reaction solution was cooled to room temperature, poured into water, and extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
- Ethyl 6-benzyloxy-1- (tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-yl) -indazole-3-carboxylate (182 mg), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 21, was added to dehydrated THF (4.78 mL). Dissolved in Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), purged with nitrogen, added LiAlH 4 (54 mg) at 0 ° C., and stirred for 1 hour while raising the temperature to room temperature.
- Methyl 2-fluoro-4-hydroxybenzoate (1.4685 g, manufactured by Chanzo FineChem) and potassium carbonate (3.61717 g; manufactured by Aldrich) were suspended in dehydrated DMF (21 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), and benzyl bromide ( 1.22 mL; Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added and stirred at 50 ° C. overnight.
- the reaction solution was cooled to room temperature, poured into water, and extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed twice with water and once with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure.
- Methyl 4- (benzyloxy) -2-fluorobenzoate (52.4 mg), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 30, is dissolved in n-butanol (1 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), and hydrazine monohydrate is obtained. (96 ⁇ L; manufactured by Aldrich) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 160 ° C. for 1 hour in a microwave sealed reaction vessel. The precipitate in the reaction solution was filtered and washed with n-butanol to obtain the title compound (39.6 mg).
- 6- (Benzyloxy) -1,2-dihydroindazol-3-one (1.9209 g) that can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 31 and the like is CH 2 Cl 2 (80 mL; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) And triethylamine (2.78 mL; manufactured by Kokusan Kagaku Co., Ltd.), Boc 2 O (4.6 mL; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), DMAP (0.4947 g; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) are added, and nitrogen substitution is performed. And stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction solution was washed twice with 1 mol / L-hydrochloric acid and once with water.
- Indazole-6-amine (24.33 g; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was dissolved in water (100 mL), 48 wt% -tetrafluoroboric acid aqueous solution (242 mL; manufactured by Aldrich), cooled to 0 ° C., and then sodium nitrite aqueous solution [ 20 mL (solution prepared by dissolving sodium nitrite (13.87 g; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) in water (20 mL)) was added dropwise for 10 minutes, and the mixture was stirred at 0 ° C. for 30 minutes. The precipitate of the reaction solution was filtered and washed with chloroform.
- the resulting precipitate was dissolved in acetic acid (250 mL) and stirred at 50 ° C. for 10 minutes, 110 ° C. for 10 minutes, and 130 ° C. for 10 minutes.
- the reaction mixture was cooled, saturated aqueous sodium carbonate solution was added, and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate.
- the organic layer was washed with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure.
- the obtained residue was dissolved in ethanol (240 mL), 2 mol / L-aqueous sodium hydroxide solution (365 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hr.
- the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure, and 2 mol / L-hydrochloric acid (200 mL), water, and saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution were added to the residue to adjust the pH to about 7, followed by extraction with ethyl acetate.
- the organic layer was washed with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. Chloroform was added to the residue, the insoluble matter was filtered, and washed with chloroform to give a crude product of the title compound (13.5401 g).
- Indazol-6-ol (4.029 g), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 35, is dissolved in dehydrated DMF (60 mL; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), imidazole (4.49 g; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), TBDPSCl (17.1 mL; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was added and stirred overnight at room temperature.
- the reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted three times with ethyl acetate.
- the organic layer was washed three times with water, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure.
- 6-tert-butyldiphenylsilyloxyindazole (29.246 g) that can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 36, etc. is dissolved in dehydrated THF (200 mL), cooled to 0 ° C., then potassium tert- Butoxide (18.2190 g; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) and N-chlorosuccinimide (17.0497 g; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) were added, followed by stirring for 4 hours while raising the temperature from 0 ° C. to room temperature. The reaction solution was poured into a saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution and extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
- 6- (tert-butyldiphenylsilyloxy) -3-chloroindazole (18.458 g), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 37, is dissolved in dehydrated THF (200 mL), and triethylamine (7.67 mL; (Optical Yakuhin Co., Ltd.), Boc 2 O (Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and 4-N, N-dimethylaminopyridine (550 mg; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were added and stirred overnight at room temperature.
- tert-butyl 6- (tert-butyldiphenylsilyloxy) -3-chloroindazole-1-carboxylate 17.415 g
- dehydrated THF 150 mL
- 1 mol / L-TBAF-THF solution 42 mL; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
- Ethyl acetate was added to the reaction solution, and the organic layer was washed once with saturated brine, once with water and once with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure. Left.
- Benzyl 2-bromoethylcarbamate (1.0563 g) that can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 40 is dissolved in dehydrated DMF (5 mL), and can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 3 Benzyl-3-cyclopropylindazol-6-ol (533.4 mg) and potassium carbonate (879.1 mg) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 50 ° C. overnight under a nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction solution was cooled to room temperature, poured into water, and the aqueous layer was extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed twice with water and once with saturated brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and the solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure.
- Benzyl 2- (1-benzyl-3-cyclopropylindazol-6-yloxy) ethylcarbamate (507 mg), 10% palladium carbon-PE-type-50% water content, which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 41 (205.4 mg; manufactured by NE Chemcat) was suspended in ethanol (12 mL), concentrated hydrochloric acid (0.19 mL; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added, and the reaction system was purged with hydrogen. It was made into atmosphere and it stirred at 60 degreeC for 1 hour. The reaction solution was cooled to room temperature, purged with nitrogen, and filtered.
- Boc 2 O-THF solution [10 mL; a solution prepared by dissolving Boc 2 O (230 mg) in THF (10 mL)] was added dropwise and
- a hydrogen-ethyl acetate solution (1.5 mL; manufactured by Kokusan Chemical Co., Ltd.) was added, and shaken overnight (600 min ⁇ 1 ) at room temperature. Nitrogen gas was blown into the reaction solution to remove the solvent, and ethyl acetate (1.5 mL) was added. Nitrogen gas was blown into the suspension to blow off the solvent, and the title compound was obtained as a hydrochloride (55 mg).
- Boc 2 O (1.14 mL; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.
- 4-N, N-dimethylaminopyridine (51.4 mg; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) were added to the solution, followed by stirring overnight while raising the temperature to room temperature. .
- N-benzyl-2- (benzyloxy) ethanamine (13.6532 g), (R) -2- (3-nitrophenyl) oxirane (20.21 g), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 56, 2-Propanol (205 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred for 36 hours under heating to reflux. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, concentrated under reduced pressure, toluene (100 mL) was added to the residue, and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The obtained residue was purified by column chromatography (“COLUMN-D”; n-hexane: ethyl acetate 85: 15 ⁇ 80: 20) to obtain the title compound (30.661 g).
- tert-butyl 6-hydroxy-3-cyclopropylindazole-1-carboxylate instead of tert-butyl 6-hydroxy-3-cyclopropylindazole-1-carboxylate, tert-butyl 6-hydroxy-3-cyclobutylindazole-1- can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 14, etc.
- the title compound (619.1 mg) was obtained in the same manner as in Reference Example 60 using carboxylate (434.5 mg).
- tert-butyl 6-hydroxy-3-cyclopropylindazole-1-carboxylate instead of tert-butyl 6-hydroxy-3-cyclopropylindazole-1-carboxylate, tert-butyl 3- (difluoromethoxy) -6-hydroxyindazole which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 34, etc.
- the title compound (2.0404 g) was obtained in the same manner as in Reference Example 60 using 1-carboxylate (1.4889 g).
- tert-butyl 6-hydroxy-3-cyclopropylindazole-1-carboxylate instead of tert-butyl 6-hydroxy-3-cyclopropylindazole-1-carboxylate, tert-butyl 3-chloro-6-hydroxyindazole-1-carboxylate that can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 39, etc.
- the title compound (1.862 g) was obtained in the same manner as in Reference Example 60 using the rate (1.3084 g).
- Example 1 means an example number.
- ex11 indicates Example 11.
- Ref means a reference example number.
- ref-61 shows the reference example 61.
- LCMS indicates liquid chromatograph mass spectrometry data (m / z). Specifically, it consists of “method”, “RT”, and “MS” described later.
- MS means mass spectrum data.
- RT means the retention time in LCMS, and the unit is minutes.
- Method means the above-mentioned LCMS condition, for example, “C” indicates the condition of (LCMS-C).
- RSO 2 Cl-1 is manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries
- RSO 2 Cl-2 is manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry
- RSO 2 Cl-3 is manufactured by Aldrich
- RSO 2 Cl-4 is manufactured by Aldrich
- RSO 2 Cl-5 is The product made by Aldrich was used.
- Example 2 means an example number.
- ex26 indicates Example 26.
- ref-63 shows the reference example 63.
- LCMS indicates liquid chromatograph mass spectrometry data (m / z). Specifically, it consists of “method”, “RT”, and “MS” described later.
- MS means mass spectrum data.
- RT means the retention time in LCMS, and the unit is minutes.
- Method means the above-mentioned LCMS condition, for example, “C” indicates the condition of (LCMS-C). RSO 2 Cl-6 manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. was used.
- reaction solution was cooled to 0 ° C., methanol (1.52 mL) was added, and then a SO 2 Cl 2 —CH 2 Cl 2 solution [64.66 mL; SO 2 Cl 2 (4.66 mL; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) Was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (60 mL)], and the mixture was stirred for 3 hours while warming to room temperature.
- the reaction solution was washed once with saturated aqueous sodium carbonate and once with saturated brine.
- 2-chloro-1- (4-fluoro-3-nitrophenyl) ethanone (.4667 g), which can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 64, is dissolved in dehydrated THF (100 mL), and 1 mol / L- (R) -CBS-toluene solution (7.5 mL; manufactured by Aldrich) was added and cooled to 0 ° C.
- BH 3 ⁇ SMe 2 (10 mL; manufactured by Aldrich) was added dropwise to the solution over 10 minutes, and the mixture was stirred at 0 ° C. for 2 hours.
- Aqueous ammonium chloride was added to the reaction mixture, and the mixture was extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
- Triethylamine (752 ⁇ L; manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) was added to the filtrate, and then concentrated under reduced pressure.
- the obtained residue was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) and methanol (10 mL), Boc 2 O (294 ⁇ L; manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added, and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight.
- (R) -tert-butyl 6- (2-((2- (3-amino-4-fluorophenyl) -2-hydroxyethyl) (tert-butoxy) can be produced by the method described in Reference Example 69 and the like. Carbonyl) amino) ethoxy) -3-chloroindazole-1-carboxylate (601.2 mg), imidazole (290.3 mg; manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) was dissolved in dehydrated DMF (5 mL), and chlorotriethylsilane (705 ⁇ L; Shin-Etsu) (Chemical Co., Ltd.) was added and stirred at room temperature for 3 hours.
- reaction solution was poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extracted twice with ethyl acetate.
- organic layer was washed twice with water and once with saturated brine, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure.
- the reaction mixture was poured into saturated sodium hydrogen carbonate and extracted once with ethyl acetate.
- the organic layer was washed once with water and once with saturated brine, and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure.
- the obtained residue was purified by column chromatography (“COLUMN-I”; methanol).
- the obtained purified product was dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (0.2 mL), 4 mol / L-hydrochloric acid-1, 4 dioxane solution (1.5 mL) was added, and the mixture was shaken overnight (600 min ⁇ 1 ) at room temperature. Nitrogen gas was blown into the reaction solution to blow off the solvent, and MTBE was added to the resulting residue to obtain a suspension. Nitrogen gas was blown into the suspension to blow off the solvent, and the title compound was obtained as a hydrochloride (40.7 mg).
- LCMS 505 [M + H]; Retention time: 1.05 minutes; LCMS conditions: C
- Human ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonist activity is performed using CHO (Chinese hamster ovary) cells transfected with a human ⁇ 3 gene inserted into pcDNA3 (Invitrogen).
- the human ⁇ 3 gene was first obtained by PCR using human adipose tissue cDNA (Clontech) with ⁇ 3 primers (Krief et al., J. Clin. Invest., Vol. 91, pp. 344-349 (1993)). A fragment is obtained, and using this as a probe, a full-length human ⁇ 3 gene is obtained from a human genomic library (Clontech).
- the cells are cultured in Ham's F-12 medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum, 400 ⁇ g / ml geneticin (Invitrogen).
- the cells are seeded in a 24-well plate at 1 ⁇ 10 5 cells / well, cultured for about 20 hours, and then left in serum-free Ham F-12 medium for 2 hours.
- Test compounds are first dissolved in DMSO, then serially diluted with Ham F-12 containing 20 mmol / L HEPES, 1 mmol / L isobutylmethylxanthine, and 1 mmol / L ascorbic acid and added to the cells. After culturing for 30 minutes, the medium is removed, 0.1 ml of 1N NaOH is added, and the mixture is left for 20 minutes.
- Human ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonist activity is carried out using CHO (Chinese hamster ovary) cells transfected with a human ⁇ 3 gene inserted into pcDNA3 (Invitrogen).
- the human ⁇ 3 gene was first obtained by PCR using a human adipose tissue cDNA (Clontech) with a ⁇ 3 primer (Krief et al., J. Clin. Invest., Vol. 91, pp344-349 (1993)). Using this as a probe, a full-length human ⁇ 3 gene is obtained from a human genomic library (Clontech).
- the cells are cultured in Ham's F-12 medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum, 400 ⁇ g / ml geneticin (Invitrogen).
- the cells are seeded in a 96-well plate at 2 ⁇ 10 4 cells / well, cultured for about 20 hours, and then left for 15 minutes in 80 uL of serum-free ham F-12 medium.
- Test compounds are first dissolved in DMSO, then serially diluted with Ham F-12 containing 100 mmol / L HEPES, 1 mmol / L isobutylmethylxanthine, and 20 uL is added to the cells.
- Human ⁇ 1A adrenergic receptor agonist activity is performed using HEK293 cells transfected with a human ⁇ 1A gene inserted into pcDNA3.1 ( ⁇ ) (Invitrogen). The cells were cultured in DMEM medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum, 400 ⁇ g / ml hygromycin B (GibcoBRL), 100 U / ml penicillin, 100 ⁇ g / ml streptomycin, and then 0.2% Pluronic F-127 (Invitrogen) and 20 ⁇ mol.
- DMEM medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum, 400 ⁇ g / ml hygromycin B (GibcoBRL), 100 U / ml penicillin, 100 ⁇ g / ml streptomycin, and then 0.2% Pluronic F-127 (Invitrogen) and 20 ⁇ mol.
- Fura-2AM (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries) containing assay buffer (20 mmol / L HEPES-KOH (pH 7.4), 115 mmol / L NaCl, 5.4 mmol / L KCl, 0.8 mmol / L MgCl 2 , 1 8 mmol / L CaCl 2 , 13.8 mmol / L D-glucose, 0.1% bovine serum albumin) 5 ′ Prepare to 10 6 cells / ml. After loading for 30 minutes in a CO 2 incubator, the excess Fura-2AM is removed by washing twice with assay buffer.
- assay buffer 20 mmol / L HEPES-KOH (pH 7.4), 115 mmol / L NaCl, 5.4 mmol / L KCl, 0.8 mmol / L MgCl 2 , 1 8 mmol / L CaCl 2 , 13.8 mmol / L D-glucose, 0.1%
- Centrifuge cells 5 'with assay buffer After preparation at 10 6 cells / ml, dispense into a 96-well UV plate (Corning) at 80 ⁇ l / well to obtain a cell plate.
- a sample plate and a cell plate to which a test compound diluted 10-fold from 10 ⁇ 5 to 10 ⁇ 12 M with assay buffer is added are set in FDSS4000 (manufactured by Hamamatsu Photonics), pre-incubated for 180 seconds, and fluorescence intensity at intervals of 2 seconds Measurement (excitation wavelength 340 nm, 380 nm, measurement wavelength 500 nm) is started.
- the Ca flux due to the test compound is calculated by calculating the peak height as the difference between the maximum value of the fluorescence intensity ratio between 340 nm and 380 nm after the addition of the test compound and the fluorescence intensity ratio before the addition of the test compound.
- the maximum response of norepinephrine (Norepinephrine) as a positive control was taken as 100%, and the ratio of the maximum response of each test compound was determined to Intrinsic Activity [I. A. (%)].
- the chemical concentration (EC50) at which the reaction rate is 50% is also determined.
- the medium is removed by suction, 30 ⁇ l / well of Picker Gene LT 2.0 (Toyo Ink) is added, and the luminescence value after 30 minutes is measured.
- the maximum response of phenylephrine as a positive control was taken as 100%, and the ratio of the maximum response of each test compound was determined by the Intrinsic Activity [I. A. (%)]. Also, the chemical concentration (EC50) at which the reaction rate is 50% is obtained.
- the medium is removed by suction, 30 ⁇ l / well of Picker Gene LT 2.0 (Toyo Ink) is added, and the luminescence value after 30 minutes is measured.
- the maximum response of phenylephrine as a positive control was taken as 100%, and the ratio of the maximum response of each test compound was determined by the Intrinsic Activity [I. A. (%)]. Also, the chemical concentration (EC50) at which the reaction rate is 50% is obtained.
- Table 3 shows the results of Test Example 1-A, Test Example 2-A, Test Example 3-A, and Test Example 4.
- ⁇ 3 receptor represents human ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonist activity
- ⁇ 1 receptor represents human ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor agonist activity
- ⁇ 2 receptor represents human ⁇ 2 adrenergic receptor agonist activity
- ⁇ 1Areceptor represents human ⁇ 1A adrenergic receptor agonist activity.
- EC50 and IA have the same meanings as described in Test Example 1-A, Test Example 2-A, Test Example 3-A, or Test Example 4 above.
- N is the number of examples.
- compound means a test compound.
- “ex” means an embodiment.
- “ex1” indicates the first embodiment.
- Z represents a comparative example.
- Z1 represents comparative example 1.
- the comparative example is a compound described in the pamphlet of International Publication No. WO03 / 035620, Comparative Example 1 is Example 86 of the International Publication, Comparative Example 2 is Example 88, and Comparative Example 3 is Example 90. .
- Table 4 shows the results of Test Example 1-B, Test Example 2-B, Test Example 3-B, and Test Example 4.
- ⁇ 3 receptor represents human ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonist activity
- ⁇ 1 receptor represents human ⁇ 1 adrenergic receptor agonist activity
- ⁇ 2 receptor represents human ⁇ 2 adrenergic receptor agonist activity
- ⁇ 1Areceptor represents human ⁇ 1A adrenergic receptor agonist activity.
- EC50 and IA have the same meanings as described in Test Example 1-B, Test Example 2-B, Test Example 3-B, or Test Example 4 above.
- N is the number of examples.
- compound means a test compound.
- “ex” means an embodiment.
- “ex1” indicates the first embodiment.
- Z represents a comparative example.
- Z1 represents comparative example 1.
- the comparative example is a compound described in the pamphlet of International Publication No. WO03 / 035620, Comparative Example 1 is Example 86 of the International Publication, Comparative Example 2 is Example 88, and Comparative Example 3 is Example 90. .
- a final concentration of 40 mmol / L KCl is repeatedly added, and it is confirmed that the contraction with respect to KCl becomes almost constant.
- the test compound is cumulatively added at a 10-fold ratio (at intervals of 20 minutes), and the relaxation reaction is observed.
- the final concentrations are 10 ⁇ 9 , 10 ⁇ 8 , 10 ⁇ 7 , 10 ⁇ 6 , 10 ⁇ 5 and 10 ⁇ 4 mol / L.
- Test Example 7 The results of Test Example 7 are shown in Table 5.
- n in Table 5 means the number of examples.
- the relaxant activity (%) is the relaxation rate (%). compound and ex are as defined above.
- Test of human isolated bladder smooth muscle relaxing action The test compound can be confirmed with reference to The Journal of Urology, 2003, No. 170, 649-653, and the human isolated bladder smooth muscle relaxing action of the test compound can be confirmed. That is, a smooth muscle specimen obtained from a human isolated bladder is suspended in an organ bath filled with a Krebs-Henselit solution aerated with a mixed gas of 95% O 2 and 5% CO 2 . Apply 1 g of static tension to the smooth muscle specimen and stabilize it for 30 minutes or more. After the static tension of the specimen is stabilized, carbachol having a final concentration of 0.1 ⁇ mol / L is repeatedly added to confirm that the contraction with respect to carbachol is almost constant.
- the test compound is cumulatively added at a 10-fold ratio at 10-minute intervals, and the relaxation reaction is observed.
- the final concentrations are 10 ⁇ 9 , 10 ⁇ 8 , 10 ⁇ 7 , 10 ⁇ 6 , 10 ⁇ 5 and 10 ⁇ 4 mol / L.
- papavine at a final concentration of 10 ⁇ 4 mol / L is added to determine the maximum relaxation response of each specimen. The relaxation rate is calculated with the relaxation response as 100%.
- the blood pressure is measured from the pressure transducer via a strain pressure amplifier (AP-641G, Nihon Kohden Co., Ltd.).
- the heart rate was measured via a Heart Rate Counter (AT-601G, Nihon Kohden Co., Ltd.) using a blood pressure pulse wave as a trigger.
- the blood pressure, average blood pressure and heart rate are output to a recorder and recorded.
- the mean blood pressure is recorded via a strain pressure amplifier (AP-641G) according to the formula ⁇ diastolic blood pressure + (systolic blood pressure ⁇ diastolic blood pressure) / 3 ⁇ .
- Test Example 9 The results of Test Example 9 are shown in Table 6.
- n means the number of examples. compound, ex, and Z are as defined above.
- MBP mean blood pressure
- Test Example 10 Saturation solubility of pure water Prepare the test compound so that it is saturated in pure water. Shake the solution for 1 hour at room temperature. Transfer the entire solution after shaking to the filter tube and centrifuge at room temperature. The filtrate is analyzed by HPLC, and the saturation solubility of the test compound is determined from the peak area value using a calibration curve.
- the compound of Example 1 was 55 mg / mL, and the compound of Example 2 was 53 mg / mL.
- Test Example 11 Solubility test in pH 1.2 hydrochloric acid buffer A test compound is accurately weighed in 500 ⁇ g, and a pH 1.2 hydrochloric acid buffer is added so as to be 1000 ⁇ g / mL. The solution is shaken at 37 ° C. for 1 hour. Transfer the entire solution after shaking to the filter tube and centrifuge at room temperature. The filtrate is analyzed by HPLC, and the peak area value of the filtrate is divided by the peak area value of the standard solution to determine the solubility of the test compound.
- the standard solution is prepared by accurately weighing 500 ⁇ g of the test compound and dissolving it in a DMSO solution to 1 mg / mL.
- the compound of Example 1 was 982 ⁇ g / mL, and the compound of Example 2 was 1000 ⁇ g / mL or more (1041 ⁇ g / mL).
- Test Example 12 Solubility test in physiological saline A test similar to Test Example 11 is conducted except that the pH 1.2 hydrochloric acid buffer is changed to physiological saline to determine the solubility of the test compound.
- the compound of Example 1 was 999 ⁇ g / mL
- the compound of Example 2 was 999 ⁇ g / mL.
- Test Example 13 Stability test in pure water Prepare the test compound to be saturated in pure water. The solution is shaken at room temperature for 1 hour. Transfer the entire solution after shaking to the filter tube and centrifuge at room temperature. The filtrate is analyzed by HPLC immediately after, 24 hours and 48 hours later, and the stability of the test compound is determined from the peak area value using a calibration curve.
- the HPLC area percentage of the compound of Example 1 was stable at 95.7% immediately after, 95.6% after 24 hours, and 95.6% after 48 hours. Further, the HPLC area percentage of the compound of Example 2 was stable at 95.2% immediately after, 95.2% after 24 hours, and 95.0% after 48 hours.
- Test Example 14 Stability test in pH 6.8 phosphate buffer The same test as in Test Example 13 is performed except that pure water is changed to pH 6.8 phosphate buffer to determine the stability of the test compound.
- the HPLC area percentage of the compound of Example 1 was stable at 95.7% immediately after, 95.5% after 24 hours, and 95.5% after 48 hours. Further, the HPLC area percentage of the compound of Example 2 was stable at 95.1% immediately after, 93.3% after 24 hours, and 94.5% after 48 hours.
- the compound represented by general formula (A-1) or general formula (1) of the present invention possible stereoisomers or racemates thereof, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, or hydrates thereof and / or Or solvates, and also their crystals have ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonistic action, resulting in diabetes, obesity, hyperlipidemia, depression, gallstones, diseases caused by biliary motility, and gastrointestinal hyperactivity It is useful as a therapeutic and preventive agent for diseases such as interstitial cystitis, overactive bladder or urinary incontinence, or as a therapeutic and preventive agent for diseases associated with a decrease in tears, and can be used in the pharmaceutical industry. .
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
Description
〔1〕下記一般式(A-1)
〔2〕下記一般式(1)
〔3〕G1が-OCHF2、ハロゲン原子、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、フッ素原子、又は塩素原子である前記〔1〕に記載の化合物又はその塩。
〔4〕G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基である前記〔1〕に記載の化合物又はその塩。
〔5〕R1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基である前記〔2〕に記載の化合物又はその塩。
〔6〕*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である前記〔1〕~〔5〕のいずれかに記載の化合物又はその塩。
〔7〕
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-(1-メトキシエチル)インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)-2-フルオロフェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;及び
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。
〔7-1〕
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-(1-メトキシエチル)インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド又はその塩。
〔7-2〕
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド又はその塩。
〔7-3〕
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド又はその塩。
〔7-4〕
(R)-N-(5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)-2-フルオロフェニル)メタンスルホンアミド又はその塩。
〔7-5〕
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド又はその塩。
〔7-6〕
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド又はその塩。
〔7-7〕
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド又はその塩。
〔8〕化合物が、
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-(1-メトキシエチル)インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;及び
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。
〔9〕前記〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれか1つに記載の化合物又はその塩を有効成分として含有するβ3アドレナリン受容体作動薬。
〔10〕前記〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれか1つに記載の化合物又はその塩を有効成分として含有する医薬。
〔11〕過活動膀胱並びに尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療剤である前記〔10〕に記載の医薬。
〔12〕前記〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれか1つに記載の化合物又はその塩を、過活動膀胱並びに尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療の必要のある患者に投与することを特徴とする、患者の生体内でβ3アドレナリン受容体を作動する方法。
〔12-1〕前記投与が、前記患者の生体内においてα1アドレナリン受容体を実質的に作動しない、前記〔12〕に記載の方法。
〔12-2〕前記患者が、薬物投与によるα1アドレナリン受容体の実質的な作動が避けられるべき患者である、前記〔12〕に記載の方法。
〔13〕前記〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれか1つに記載の化合物又はその塩の有効量を、患者に投与することを特徴とする過活動膀胱並びに尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療方法。
〔13-1〕前記患者が、薬物投与によるα1アドレナリン受容体の実質的な作動が避けられるべき患者である、前記〔13〕に記載の方法。
〔14〕前記〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれか1つに記載の化合物又はその塩の有効量を、患者に投与することを特徴とする尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療方法。
〔14-1〕前記患者が、薬物投与によるα1アドレナリン受容体の実質的な作動が避けられるべき患者である、前記〔14〕に記載の方法。
〔15〕下記一般式(A-4)
〔16〕下記一般式(3)
〔17〕J1は-CH(Me)OMe、-OCHF2、塩素原子、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、J2は水素原子、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基、ベンジル基、又はテトラヒドロピラニル基であり、J3は水素原子、ベンジル基、又はtert-ブチルジフェニルシリル基である〔15〕記載の化合物又はその塩。
〔18〕R1は-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、P1は水素原子、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基、ベンジル基、又はテトラヒドロピラニル基を表し、P2は水素原子、ベンジル基、又はtert-ブチルジフェニルシリル基を表す前記〔16〕に記載の化合物又はその塩。
〔19〕
1-ベンジル-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
1-ベンジル-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール;
3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-6-オール;
tert-ブチル 6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;及び
tert-ブチル 3-クロロ-6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。
〔20〕
1-ベンジル-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
1-ベンジル-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール;及び
3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-6-オール;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。
一般式(1):
*は不斉炭素を意味する。
(1)*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(2)R1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基である本発明の化合物;
(3)R2が、メチル基である本発明の化合物;
(4)R3-1、R3-2、R4-1、R4-2、及びR4-3が、水素原子である本発明の化合物;
(5)R1が-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(6)R1が、-CH(Me)OMeであり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(7)R1が、シクロプロピル基であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(8)R1が、シクロブチル基であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
一般式(A-1)で示される本発明の化合物において好ましい置換基の組合せとして以下の組み合わせが挙げられる。
(9)G1が、-CH(G4)OMeであり、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子であり、G4はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、又はiso-プロピル基である本発明の化合物;
(10)G1が、-CH(Me)OMeであり、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(11)G1が、-CH(Me)OMeであり、G2はメチル基であり、G3は水素原子であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(12)G1が、-CH(Me)OMeであり、G2はメチル基であり、G3は水素原子である本発明の化合物;
(13)G1が、-OCHF2であり、G2はiso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(14)G1が、-OCHF2であり、G2はiso-プロピル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子である本発明の化合物;
(15)G1が、-OCHF2であり、G2はiso-プロピル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(16)G1が、ハロゲン原子であり、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(17)G1が、塩素原子であり、G2はiso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(18)G1が、塩素原子であり、G2はiso-プロピル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子である本発明の化合物;
(19)G1が、塩素原子であり、G2はiso-プロピル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(20)G1が、シクロプロピル基であり、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(21)G1が、シクロプロピル基であり、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子である本発明の化合物;
(21)G1が、シクロプロピル基であり、G2はメチル基であり、G3は水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子である本発明の化合物;
(22)G1が、シクロプロピル基であり、G2はメチル基であり、G3は水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(23)G1が、シクロブチル基であり、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(24)G1が、シクロブチル基であり、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子である本発明の化合物;
(25)G1が、シクロブチル基であり、G2はメチル基であり、G3は水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子である本発明の化合物;
(26)G1が、シクロブチル基であり、G2はメチル基であり、G3は水素原子、塩素原子である本発明の化合物;
(27)G1が、シクロブチル基であり、G2はメチル基であり、G3は水素原子、塩素原子であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(28)G2が、メチル基、エチル基、又はn-プロピル基であり、G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(29)G2が、メチル基であり、G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(30)G2が、メチル基であり、G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、G3は水素原子、フッ素原子、又は塩素原子である本発明の化合物;
(31)G2が、メチル基であり、G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、G3は水素原子、フッ素原子、又は塩素原子であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(32)G2が、iso-プロピル基、フェニル基であり、G1が、-CH(G4)OMe、-OCHF2、-OCF3、ハロゲン原子、又は下記一般式(A-2)~(A-3)で示される基であり、
(33)G2が、iso-プロピル基、フェニル基であり、G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、-OCHF2、塩素原子、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である本発明の化合物;
(34)G2が、iso-プロピル基、フェニル基であり、G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、-OCHF2、塩素原子、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はフッ素原子、塩素原子である本発明の化合物;
(35)G2が、iso-プロピル基、フェニル基であり、G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、-OCHF2、塩素原子、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基であり、G3は水素原子、又はフッ素原子、塩素原子であり、*で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である本発明の化合物;
(36)前記(1)~(35)のいずれかに記載の本発明の化合物が、その遊離状の化合物である態様も、本発明の好ましい一態様として挙げられる。また、それらの塩も好ましい一態様として挙げられ、それらの塩としては塩酸塩が特に好ましい例として挙げられる。
不活性溶媒としては、ジクロロメタン、クロロホルム、1、4-ジオキサン、酢酸エチル、メチル-tert-ブチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、又はアニソールなどが挙げられる。有機酸としては、酢酸、トリフルオロ酢酸、メタンスルホン酸、又はp-トルエンスルホン酸などが挙げられる。ルイス酸としては、三臭化ホウ素、三フッ化ホウ素、臭化アルミニウム、又は塩化アルミニウムなどが挙げられる。無機酸としては、塩酸、塩化水素-1、4-ジオキサン、塩化水素-酢酸エチル、臭化水素酸、又は硫酸などが挙げられる。有機酸、ルイス酸、又は無機酸、或いはこれらの混合物としては、臭化水素/酢酸等が挙げられる。
不活性溶媒としては、テトラヒドロフラン、ジオキサン、ジメトキシエタン、若しくはジエチルエーテルなどのエーテル類、メタノール若しくはエタノールなどのアルコール類、ベンゼン若しくはトルエンなどのベンゼン類、アセトン若しくはメチルエチルケトンなどのケトン類、アセトニトリルなどのニトリル類、ジメチルホルムアミドなどのアミド類、酢酸エチルなどのエステル類、水、又は酢酸などを単独で用いるか、或いはそれらの混合溶媒が挙げられる。触媒としては、パラジウム炭素粉末、酸化白金(PtO2)、又は活性化ニッケルなどが挙げられる。無機酸としては、塩酸、又は硫酸などが挙げられる。
有機溶媒としては、テトラヒドロフラン、酢酸、又はアセトニトリルなどが挙げられる。フッ化物イオンは、例えば、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムフルオリド、フッ化水素酸、フッ化水素-ピリジン錯体、又はフッ化水素-トリエチルアミン錯体などを用いて発生させればよい。
一般式(X)で示される化合物を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて脱保護反応を行い、一般式(1)で示される化合物を製造することができる。好適な例として、上記の酸性条件下での脱保護反応を行うか、上記の加水素分解による脱保護反応を単独で用いるか、或いは組み合わせて用いることが好ましい。いずれにしても、一般式(X)で示される化合物中に存在する各種の保護基に対して適切な脱保護反応を選択すればよい。
一般式(XI)で示される化合物と一般式(XIII)で示される化合物を、不活性溶媒中、ホスフィン類とアゾ化合物との存在下反応させることにより、一般式(X)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XII)で示される化合物と一般式(XIII)で示される化合物とを、不活性溶媒中、塩基を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(X)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XV)で示される化合物を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて脱保護反応を行い、一般式(1)で示される化合物を製造することができる。好適な例として、上記の酸性条件下での脱保護反応を行うか、上記の加水素分解による脱保護反応を単独で用いるか、或いは組み合わせて用いることが好ましい。いずれにしても、一般式(XV)で示される化合物中に存在する各種の保護基に対して適切な脱保護反応を選択すればよい。例えば、一般式(XV)においてR10(ベンジル基)、R11(ベンジル基)、R15(ベンジル基)で示される化合物の時は、加水素分解による脱保護反応が好ましい。加水素分解による脱保護反応としては、不活性溶媒中、触媒及び塩酸を加え、水素ガス存在下で行う反応が挙げられる。一般式(XV)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、触媒を加え、水素ガスの存在下で反応を行い、R11(ベンジル基)、R15(ベンジル基)を脱保護後、さらにその反応液に塩酸を加え、水素ガスの存在下で反応を行い、R10(ベンジル基)を脱保護し、一般式(1)で示される化合物を得る方法も、特に好ましい脱保護方法として挙げられる。
一般式(XIV)で示される化合物を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて脱保護反応を行い、一般式(1)で示される化合物を製造することができる。好適な例として、上記の酸性条件下での脱保護反応を行うか、上記の加水素分解による脱保護反応を単独で用いるか、或いは組み合わせて用いることが挙げられる。いずれにしても、一般式(XIV)で示される化合物に存在する各種の保護基に対して適切な脱保護反応を選択すればよい。例えば、加水素分解による脱保護反応は、前記の工程2-1で例示した方法などが挙げられる。
国際公開番号WO03/035620号(引用することでここに組み込まれる。)の記載の方法に準じて行うことができる。すなわち、一般式(XVIII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、還元剤と反応させることにより、一般式(XV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XVI)で示される化合物と一般式(XIX)で示される化合物を、不活性溶媒中、必要に応じて塩基を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XIV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XVII)で示される化合物と一般式(XIX)で示される化合物を、不活性溶媒中、反応させることにより一般式(XV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XIX)で示される化合物と一般式(XX)で示される化合物を、不活性溶媒中、必要に応じて塩基を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XVIII)で示される化合物が得られる。不活性溶媒としては、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、又はアセトニトリルなどを単独で用いるか、或いはこれらの混合溶媒が挙げられるが、好ましくはN,N-ジメチルホルムアミドが例示される。塩基としては、トリエチルアミン、ジイソプロピルエチルアミン、若しくは1,8-ジアザビシクロ〔5,4,0〕-ウンデセンなどの有機第3級アミン、又は炭酸カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸セシウム、若しくは炭酸水素ナトリウム等のアルカリ金属化合物が挙げられ、トリエチルアミン、又はジイソプロピルエチルアミンが好ましい。
例えば和光純薬工業株式会社などから商業的に入手可能である3-アミノアセトフェノン(XXI)とメタンスルホニルクロリド(XXII)を、不活性溶媒中、塩基を加えて反応させることにより化合物(XXIII)が得られる。
化合物(XXIII)のスルホンアミド基の保護反応を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことにより一般式(XXIV)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、R11がベンジル基のときは化合物(XXIII)とベンジル化剤を不活性溶媒中、塩基及び触媒を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXIV)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXIV)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、ハロゲン化剤を加え、必要に応じてさらにメタノールを加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XX)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XX)で示される化合物を有機溶媒中、還元剤と反応させることにより、一般式(XXV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXV)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、塩基を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XVII)で示される化合物が得られる。
スキーム3に記載の製造方法等にて得ることができる一般式(XXV)で示される化合物の水酸基の保護反応を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XVI)で示される化合物を得ることができる。好適な例としては、一般式(XXV)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒下、塩基を加え、シリル化剤と反応させることにより、一般式(XVI)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。不活性溶媒としては、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミドなどが挙げられる。塩基としては、イミダゾールなどが挙げられる。シリル化剤としては、トリエチルクロロシラン、又はtert-ブチルジメチルクロロシランなどが挙げられる。
国際公開番号WO03/035620号の記載の方法に準じて行うことができる。すなわち、一般式(XVI)で示される化合物と一般式(XXVI)で示される化合物とを、無溶媒又は不活性溶媒中、必要に応じて塩基を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XI)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XI)で示される化合物を、通常の化学文献、例えば第4版実験化学講座(日本化学会編、丸善株式会社出版)、19巻、438~446頁に記載の方法、或いはその参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて行うことで、一般式(XII)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XI)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、ハロゲン化試薬とホスフィン類を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XII)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXVII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、塩基及びスルホニル化試薬を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXVIII)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XIII)で示される化合物と一般式(XXVIII)で示される化合物とを、不活性溶媒中、塩基を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXIX)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXIX)で示される化合物の保護基の除去が必要な場合には、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて、R10、R15に対してR16の脱保護反応を選択的に行えばよい。また、R10、R16に対してR15の脱保護反応を選択的に行う別の態様もある。例えば、一般式(XXIX)においてR15とR16が共にベンジル基である場合、R15又はR16のベンジル基が選択的に片方だけ脱保護される条件が挙げられる。その条件としては、不活性溶媒中、常圧又は加圧下の水素ガス存在下、触媒、塩酸を加えて反応を制御しながら行って、一般式(XIX)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XIII)で示される化合物と一般式(XXVII)で示される化合物とを、不活性溶媒中、ホスフィン類とアゾ化合物を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXIX)で示される化合物を得ることができる。
一般式(XXX)で示される化合物を通常の化学文献、例えば第4版実験化学講座(日本化学会編、丸善株式会社出版)、21巻、1~23頁に記載の方法、或いは当文献記載の参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて反応を行うことで一般式(XXXI)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXX)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、酸化剤を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXXI)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXI)で示される化合物を第4版実験化学講座(日本化学会編、丸善株式会社出版)、25巻、60~72頁に記載の方法、或いは当文献記載の参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて反応を行うことで、一般式(XXXII)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例としては、一般式(XXXI)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、R2の導入のためのGrignard試薬を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXXII)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXII)で示される化合物を通常の化学文献、例えば第4版実験化学講座(日本化学会編、丸善株式会社出版)、20巻、187~200頁に記載の方法、或いは当文献記載の参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて反応を行うことで一般式(XXXIII)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例としては、一般式(XXXII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、塩基及びメチル化剤を加えて反応させることにより一般式(XXXIII)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXIII)で示される化合物の保護基の除去が必要な場合には、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XXXIV)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例としては、参考例26に記載した方法が挙げられる。
和光純薬工業(株)などから入手可能な化合物(XXXV)の水酸基の保護反応は、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行えばよい。好適な例として、化合物(XXXV)を不活性溶媒下、塩基及び保護試薬を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXXVI)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXVI)で示される化合物を通常の化学文献、例えば第4版実験化学講座(日本化学会編、丸善株式会社出版)、25巻、59~82頁に記載の方法、あるいは当文献記載の参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて行うことで一般式(XXXVII)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXVI)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、R1基を導入するためのGrignard試薬、必要に応じて触媒を加えて反応させ、イミンを形成後、酸性水溶液を加え、加水分解することで一般式(XXXVII)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXVII)で示される化合物の保護基の除去が必要な場合には、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XXXVIII)で示される化合物が得られる。R17を適切に選択することにより工程12-2と工程12-3を連続して行うこともできる。
一般式(XXXVIII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒下、ヒドラジン類を加え、必要に応じて塩基を加えて反応させることにより、化合物(XIII)が得られる。
ChemPacific社などから入手可能な化合物(XXXIX)を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて反応を行い、化合物(XXXX)が得られる。好適な例としては、参考例16に記載した方法が挙げられる。
化合物(XXXX)を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて反応を行うことにより、一般式(XXXXI)で示される化合物を得ることができる。好適な例として、化合物(XXXX)をアルコール類溶媒中、酸触媒又は塩化チオニルを加えて反応を行うことにより一般式(XXXXI)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXXI)で示される化合物の水酸基の保護が必要な場合は、上記の水酸基の保護基を選択し、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて水酸基の保護反応を行うことで、一般式(XXXXII)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXXI)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、塩基を加え、シリル化剤と反応させることにより、一般式(XXXXII)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXXII)で示される化合物のインダゾールの保護基が必要な場合は、上記のインダゾールの保護基を選択し、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで一般式(XXXXIII)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXXII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、保護試薬を加え、必要に応じて塩基又は酸触媒を加えて反応させることで一般式(XXXXIII)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXXXIII)で示される化合物を通常の化学文献、例えば第4版実験化学講座(日本化学会編、丸善株式会社出版)、26巻、159~266頁に記載の方法、或いはその参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて行うことで、一般式(XXX)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXXIII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、還元剤を加えて反応を行い、一般式(XXX)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXXIV)で示される化合物を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて脱保護反応を行い、一般式(A-1)で示される化合物を製造することができる。好適な例として、上記の酸性条件下での脱保護反応を行うか、上記の加水素分解による脱保護反応を単独で用いるか、或いは組み合わせて用いることが挙げられる。いずれにしても、一般式(XXXXIV)で示される化合物に存在する各種の保護基に対して適切な脱保護反応を選択すればよい。
一般式(XXXXV)で示される化合物と一般式(XXXXVI)で示される化合物を、不活性溶媒中、塩基を加えて反応させることにより一般式(XXXXIV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXVI)で示される化合物は、例えば、スキーム11に記載の方法によっても得ることができる。
一般式(XXXXVII)で示される化合物と一般式(XXXXVIII)で示される化合物を、不活性溶媒中、反応させることにより一般式(XXXXIX)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXIX)で示される化合物の水酸基の保護反応を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XXXXX)で示される化合物を得ることができる。
一般式(XXXXX)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、触媒を加え、水素ガスの存在下で反応を行うことにより一般式(XXXXXI)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXI)で示される化合物と一般式(XIII-I)で示される化合物とを、不活性溶媒中、ホスフィン類とアゾ化合物を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXXXVI)で示される化合物を得ることができる。
一般式(XXXXVII)で示される化合物は、例えば、スキーム12に記載の方法によっても得ることができる。
一般式(XXXXXII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、ハロゲン化剤を加え、必要に応じてさらにメタノールを加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXXXXIII)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXIII)で示される化合物を有機溶媒中、還元剤と反応させることにより、一般式(XXXXXIV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXIV)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、塩基を加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXXXVII)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXVI)で示される化合物は、例えば、スキーム13に記載の方法によっても得ることができる。
一般式(XXXXVII)で示される化合物と一般式(XIX-I)で示される化合物を、不活性溶媒中、反応させることにより一般式(XXXXXV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXV)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、触媒を加え、水素ガスの存在下で反応を行うことにより一般式(XXXXXVI)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXVI)で示される化合物の水酸基の保護反応を、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XXXXVI)で示される化合物を得ることができる。
一般式(XIII-I)で示される化合物は、例えば、スキーム14に記載の方法によっても得ることができる。
Chanzou Fine Chem社などから入手可能な化合物(XXXXXVII)の水酸基の保護が必要な場合には、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことにより、一般式(XXXXXVIII)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXVIII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒下、ヒドラジン類、必要に応じて塩基は加えて反応させることにより、一般式(XXXXXIX)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXIX)で示される化合物のアミンの保護基が必要な場合は、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XXXXXX)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXXXIX)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、Boc2O、塩基、必要に応じて触媒を加えて反応させることで、一般式(XXXXXX)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXX)で示される化合物を通常の化学文献、例えばOrganoFluorine Chemistry(Kenji Uneyama著、Blackwell出版)、257-292頁、又は310頁に記載の方法、あるいは当文献記載の参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて行うことで、一般式(XXXXXXI)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXXXX)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、ジフルオロメチル化試薬、塩基と反応させることにより、一般式(XXXXXXI)で示される化合物が得られる。
ジフルオロメチル化試薬は一般式(XXXXXX)で示される化合物に対して1~20倍モルが挙げられ、1~10倍モルが好ましい。塩基は一般式(XXXXXX)で示される化合物に対して1~20倍モルが挙げられ、1~10倍モルが好ましい。反応温度は25℃~加熱還流が挙げられ、25~100℃が好ましい。反応時間は0.1~48時間が挙げられ、1時間~24時間が好ましい。
一般式(XXXXXXI)で示される化合物の保護基の除去が必要な場合には、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XIII-I)で示される化合物が得られる。
東京化成工業(株)などから入手可能な化合物(XXXXXXII)を通常の化学文献、例えば第4版実験化学講座(日本化学会編、丸善株式会社出版)、20巻、112~114頁に記載の方法、或いは当文献記載の参考文献などに記載の方法に準じて行うことで一般式(XXXXXXIII)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、化合物(XXXXXXII)を不活性溶媒中、ジアゾニウム化試薬又はニトロソ化試薬、及び酸を加えて反応させることにより、化合物(XXXXXXII)のジアゾニウム塩を経由した後、酢酸などと反応させることにより一般式(XXXXXXIII)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXXXXIII)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、ハロゲン化試薬を加え、必要に応じて塩基を加えて反応させることにより一般式(XXXXXXIV)で示される化合物が得られる。
一般式(XXXXXXIV)で示される化合物のインダゾールの保護基が必要な場合は、上記のインダゾールの保護基を選択し、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことにより、一般式(XXXXXXV)で示される化合物を得ることができる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXXXXIV)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、保護試薬を加え、必要に応じて塩基又は触媒を加えて反応させることで、一般式(XXXXXXV)で示される化合物を得る方法が挙げられる。
一般式(XXXXXXV)で示される化合物の保護基の除去が必要な場合には、公知の方法、例えばProtective Groups in Organic Synthesis、John Wiley and Sons 刊(2007年版)に記載の方法などに準じて行うことで、一般式(XIII-I)で示される化合物が得られる。好適な例として、一般式(XXXXXXI)で示される化合物を不活性溶媒中、上記に記載したシリル基の脱保護反応を行うことで、一般式(XIII-I)で示される化合物が得られる。
(1)薄層クロマトグラフィー(TLC)はPrecoated silica gel 60 F254(メルク社製、製品番号5715-1M)を使用した。クロロホルム:メタノール(1:0~1:1)、又は、酢酸エチル:ヘキサン(1:0~0:1)などにより展開後、UV(254nm又は365nm)照射、ヨウ素溶液、過マンガン酸カリウム水溶液、りんモリブデン酸 (エタノール溶液)、ニンヒドリン、又はジニトロフェニルヒドラジン塩酸溶液などによる呈色により確認した。
(2)カラムクロマトグラフィーは以下の方法で行った。
「COLUMN-A」と記載したものについてはマルチプレップYFLC(山善社製)を用い、カラムは同社製Hi-FlashTM Column-Silicagelシリーズを使用した。
「COLUMN-B」と記載したものについてはマルチプレップYFLC(山善社製)を用い、カラムはMORITEX社製PurifPack-Siシリーズを使用した。
「COLUMN-C」と記載したものについてはMORITEX社製2chパラレル精製装置「Purif-α2(50F)」を用い、カラムは同社製PurifPack-Siシリーズを使用した。
「COLUMN-D」と記載したものについてはMORITEX社製2chパラレル精製装置「Purif-α2(50F)」を用い、カラムは山善社製Hi-FlashTM Column-Silicagelシリーズを使用した。
「COLUMN-E」と記載したものについてはシリカゲル60N(球状、中性、40~100μm、関東化学社製)を使用した。
「COLUMN-F」と記載したものについてはBOND ELUTシリーズ(MEGA BE-Si;VARIAN社製)を使用した。
「COLUMN-G」と記載したものについてはQuad1分取システム(Biotage社製)用い、カラムは同社製KP-Sil-12M、40Sまたは40Mのいずれかのカートリッジカラムを試料の量に応じて1本または数本使用した。
「COLUMN-H」と記載したものについてはシリカゲル(Merck社製)を使用した。
「COLUMN-I」と記載したものについてはBONDESIL-SCX 40UM(VARIAN社製)を使用した。
(3)HPLC精製については、LCMS分取システム(waters社製)を用い、「HPLC-A」と記載したものについてはDevelosil C-30-UG-5(野村化学社製)を使用し、「HPLC-B」と記載したものについてはODSカラムを使用した。溶出液は0.1%酢酸の含有した水-アセトニトリル溶媒を用いた。HPLC精製の場合には、とくに断らない限り、分子量をトリガーとして目的物を取得し、凍結乾燥法により溶媒を除去した。
(4)核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)の測定には、AL-300(FT-NMR、JEOL社製)、Gemini-300(FT-NMR、Varian社製)又はLA-400(FT-NMR、JEOL社製)を用いて測定した。化学シフトはテトラメチルシラン(TMS)を内部標準として用い、δ(ppm)で、また結合定数はJ(Hz)で示した。なおスプリッティングパターンの記号は、s;singlet 、d;doublet、t;triplet、q;quartet 、qu;quintet、dd ;doublet doublet、td;triplet doublet、m;multiplet、brs;broad singlet、brd;broad doublet、brdd;broad doublet doublet、brddd;broad doublet doublet doubletで表した。
(5)「LCMS」については液体クロマトグラフ質量分析スペクトル(LC-MS)にてマススペクトルを測定した。分析にあたっては、「LCMS条件;A」と記載したものについては以下に示す(LCMS-A)、「LCMS条件;B」と記載したものについては以下に示す(LCMS-B)、「LCMS条件;C」と記載したものについては以下に示す(LCMS-C)、又は「LCMS条件;D」と記載したものについては以下に示す(LCMS-D)に記載した条件下で測定を行った。
(LCMS-A)質量分析装置としてPlatform-LC型質量分析装置[マイクロマス(Micromass)社製]を用いエレクトロスプレー(ESI)法により測定した。液体クロマト装置はギルソン(GILSON)社製の装置を使用した。分離カラムはDevelosil C30-UG-5(50×4.6mm)(野村化学社製)を用いた。溶出は一般には、流速2ml/分、溶媒としてA液=水[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]、B液=アセトニトリル[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]を用い、0分から4分までB液を5~98%(v/v)直線グラジェントした後、6分までB液を98%で溶出する条件で測定した。
(LCMS-B)質量分析装置としてPlatform-LC型質量分析装置[マイクロマス(Micromass)社製]を用いエレクトロスプレー(ESI)法により測定した。液体クロマト装置はギルソン(GILSON)社製の装置を使用した。分離カラムはDevelosil C30-UG-5(50×4.6mm)(野村化学社製)を用いた。溶出は一般には、流速2ml/分、溶媒としてA液=水[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]、B液=アセトニトリル[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]を用い、0分から5分までB液を5~100%(v/v)直線グラジェントした後、9分までB液を100%で溶出し、9.01分から10分までB液を5%で溶出する条件で測定した。
(LCMS-C)質量分析装置としてシングル四重極型質量分析装置;UPLC/SQDシステム[Waters社製]を用い、エレクトロスプレー(ESI)法により測定した。液体クロマト装置はWaters社製Acquity Ultra Performance LCシステムを使用した。分離カラムはACQUITY UPLC BEH C18 2.1×50mm 1.7μm[Waters社製]を用いた。溶出は一般には、流速 0.6mL/分、A液=水[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]、B液=アセトニトリル[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]として、0分から2.0分までB液を5~90%(v/v)直線グラジェント、2.0分から2.5分までB液を90~98%(v/v)直線グラジェントした後、2.6分から2.8分までB液を5%で溶出する条件で測定した。
(LCMS-D)質量分析装置としてシングル四重極型質量分析装置;UPLC/SQDシステム[Waters社製]を用い、エレクトロスプレー(ESI)法により測定した。液体クロマト装置はWaters社製Acquity Ultra Performance LCシステムを使用した。分離カラムはACQUITY UPLC BEH C18 2.1×50mm 1.7μm[Waters社製]を用いた。溶出は一般には、流速 0.6mL/分、A液=水[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]、B液=アセトニトリル[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]として、0分から2.0分までB液を50~90%(v/v)直線グラジェント、2.0分から2.5分までB液を90~98%(v/v)直線グラジェントした後、2.6分から2.8分までB液を50%で溶出する条件で測定した。
(LCMS-E)質量分析装置としてシングル四重極型質量分析装置;UPLC/SQDシステム[Waters社製]を用い、エレクトロスプレー(ESI)法により測定した。液体クロマト装置はWaters社製Acquity Ultra Performance LCシステムを使用した。分離カラムはACQUITY UPLC BEH C18 2.1×50mm 1.7μm[Waters社製]を用いた。溶出は一般には、流速 0.6mL/分、A液=水[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]、B液=アセトニトリル[0.1%(v/v)酢酸含有]として、0分から2.0分までB液を70~90%(v/v)直線グラジェント、2.0分から2.5分までB液を90~98%(v/v)直線グラジェントした後、2.6分から2.8分までB液を50%で溶出する条件で測定した。
(6)イオンクロマトグラフィーについては、陰イオン測定には、カラムはlonPac AS14(日本ダイオネクス)、移動相は、流速 1.2mL/分、3.5mmol/L炭酸ナトリウムを含む1.0mmol/L炭酸水素ナトリウム水溶液を使用し、カラム温度は30℃、検出器は電気伝導度検出器を使用した。標準液は、陰イオン混合標準液陰イオン混合標準液IV(関東化学社製)を使用した。また、陽イオン測定には、カラムはlonPac CS14(日本ダイオネクス)、移動相は、流速 1.0mL/分、10mmol/Lメタンスルホン酸水溶液を使用し、カラム温度は30℃、検出器は電気伝導度検出器を使用した。標準液は、陽イオン混合標準液陰イオン混合標準液II(関東化学社製)を使用した。
THF;テトラヒドロフラン
Boc2O;二炭酸ジ-tert-ブチル
DMF;N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド
TBDMSCl;tert-ブチルジメチルシリルクロリド
TBDPSCl;tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルクロリド
DMAP;4-ジメチルアミノピリジン
TBAF;テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムフルオリド
TMAD;N,N,N’,N’-テトラメチルアゾジカルボキサミド
MTBE;メチル-tert-ブチルエーテル
DBU;1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5,4,0]-7-ウンデセン
DIAD;ジイソプロピル アゾジカルボキシレート
Et2O;ジエチルエーテル
(R)-CBS;(R)-5,5-ジフェニル-2-メチル-3,4-プロパノ-1,3,2-オキサザボロリジン
また化学構造式を示す化式において、次のような略語及び単語を用いる。
Bn;ベンジル基
Boc;tert-ブトキシカルボニル基
TBDMSO;tert-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ基
TBDPSO;tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ基
THP;テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラニル基
Cbz;ベンジルオキシカルボニル基
(R)-N-ベンジル-N-(3-(2-(ベンジル(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)-1-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;国際公開特許第WO03/035620号の参考例1
4-(tert-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ)-2-フルオロベンゾニトリル
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.25(3H,s),0.25(3H,s),0.98(9H,s),6.62~6.70(2H,m),7.44~7.50(1H,m)
シクロプロピル(2-フルオロ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタノン
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)0.97~1.04(4H,m),2.56~2.65(1H,m),6.61~6.72(2H,m),7.64~7.72(1H,m)
LCMS:179.1[M-H];保持時間:3.20分;LCMS条件:B
1-ベンジル-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)0.87~0.99(4H,m),2.14~2.26(1H,m),5.38(2H,s),6.61(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.8),6.69(1H,d,J=1.8),7.11~7.31(5H,m),7.53(1H,d,J=8.8),9.57(1H,brs)
LCMS:265.3[M+H];保持時間:4.02分;LCMS条件:A
3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール
LCMS:175.1[M+H];保持時間:2.85分;LCMS条件:A
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.95~1.00(4H,m),1.11(9H,s),2.04~2.14(1H,m),6.59(1H,d,J=2.2),6.73(1H,dd,J=2.2,8.8),7.33~7.49(7H,m),7.72~7.75(4H,m)
LCMS:413.2[M+H];保持時間:6.23分;LCMS条件:B
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.97~1.28(13H,m),1.41(9H,s),2.07~2.15(1H,m),6.78(1H,dd,J=2.2,8.4),7.33~7.45(8H,m),7.66~7.74(4H,m)
LCMS:513.1[M+H];保持時間:7.59分;LCMS条件:B
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.96~1.23(4H,m),1.64(9H,s),2.12~2.22(1H,m),6.26(1H,brs),6.87(1H,dd,J=2.2,8.8),7.50~7.61(2H,m)
LCMS:275.1[M+H];保持時間:4.08分;LCMS条件:B
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)フェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.54(6H,q,J=7.7),0.89(9H,t,J=7.7),1.03~1.19(4H,m),1.44~1.65(18H、m),1.68(9H,s),2.13~2.17(1H,m),3.18~3.63(7H,m),4.02~4.16(2H,m),4.94~5.14(1H,m),6.84(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.4),7.13~7.53(6H,m)
LCMS:845.3[M+H];保持時間:8.18分;LCMS条件:B
(R)-N-(3-(1-ヒドロキシ-2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)エチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)0.92~0.99(4H,m),2.19~2.28(1H,m),3.00(3H,s),3.08~3.46(4H,m),4.30~4.40(2H,m),5.01(1H,d,J=8.3),6.77(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.8)6.89(1H,d,J=1.8),7.11~7.17(2H,m),7.30~7.37(2H,m),7.67(1H,d,J=9.0),9.02(1H,brs),9.33(1H,brs),9.86(1H,s)
LCMS:431.1[M+H];保持時間:2.32分;LCMS条件:B
シクロブチル(2-フルオロ-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタノン
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)1.71~1.80(1H,m),1.92~2.04(1H,m),2.15~2.23(4H,m),3.79~3.85(1H,m),6.61(1H,dd,J=2.0,13.5),6.72(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.42),7.70~7.76(1H,m),10.80(1H,brs)
LCMS:195.1[M+H];保持時間;3.68分;LCMS条件:B
1-ベンジル-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)1.89~2.10(2H,m),2.32~2.41(4H,m),3.78~3.84(1H,m),5.44(2H,s),6.62(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.4),6.72(1H,d,J=1.8),7.14~7.32(5H,m),7.51(1H,d,J=8.4),10.33(1H,brs)
LCMS:279.2[M+H];保持時間;4.25分;LCMS条件:B
3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);1.87~2.20(2H,m),2.25~2.42(4H,m),3.43~3.92(1H,m),6.65(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.8),6.73(1H,d,J=2.0),7.56(1H,d,J=8.8)
LCMS:189.1[M+H];保持時間:3.06分;LCMS条件:A
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.11(9H,s),1.94~2.16(2H,m),2.39~2.49(4H,m),3.80~3.86(1H,m),6.61(1H,d,J=1.8),6.72(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.4)7.33~7.47(7H,m),7.72~7.75(4H,m)
LCMS:427.1[M+H];保持時間:6.63分;LCMS条件:B
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.11(9H,s),1.42(9H,s),1.98~2.13(2H,m),2.38~2.57(4H,m),3.79~3.85(1H,m),6.77(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.6),7.32~7.44(8H,m),7.70~7.74(4H,m)
LCMS:527.4[M+H];保持時間:7.99分;LCMS条件:B
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.63(9H,s),1.94~2.17(2H,m),2.37~2.59(4H,m),3.87~3.89(1H,m),6.86(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.4),7.53~7.55(2H,m)
LCMS:289.1[M+H];保持時間:4.42分;LCMS条件:B
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)フェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.54(6H,q,J=7.7),0.89(9H,t,J=8.1),1.44~1.70(27H,m),1.91~2.23(2H,m),2.39~2.59(4H,m),3.22~3.63(7H,m),3.84~3.87(1H,m),4.02~4.12(2H,m),4.94~5.14(1H,m),6.84(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.8),7.13~7.54(6H,m)
LCMS:859.3[M+H];保持時間:8.50分;LCMS条件:B
(R)-N-(3-(1-ヒドロキシ-2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)エチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)1.89~2.14(2H,m),2.33~2.41(4H,m),3.00(3H,s),3.05~3.08(1H,m),3.22~3.25(1H,m),3.46~3.47(2H,m),3.82~3.88(1H,m),4.35~4.49(2H,m),5.01(1H,d,J=8.1),6.77(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.8),6.92(1H,d,J=2.0),7.11~7.17(2H,m),7.30~7.37(2H,m),7.64(1H,d,J=8.8),9.01(1H,brs),9.31(1H,brs),9.85(1H,s)
LCMS:445.1[M+H];保持時間:2.43分;LCMS条件:B
6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-3-カルボン酸
LCMS:179.1[M+H];保持時間:1.94分;LCMS条件:A
エチル 6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-3-カルボキシレート
LCMS:207.1[M+H];保持時間:2.80分;LCMS条件:A
エチル 6-tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシインダゾール-3-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.14(9H,s),1.42(3H,t,J=6.9),1.47-2.18(5H,m),3.46-3.54(1H,m),3.84-3.87(1H,m),4.44(2H,q,J=7.1),5.47(1H,dd,J=2.7,9.9),6.86(1H,d,J=2.0),7.33-7.46(6H,m),7.71-7.76(4H,m),7.90(1H,d,J=8.6)
LCMS:445.1[M+H];保持時間:6.09分;LCMS条件:B
エチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-3-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.14(9H,s),1.42(3H,t,J=6.9),1.47-2.18(5H,m),3.46-3.54(1H,m),3.84-3.87(1H,m),4.44(2H,q,J=7.1),5.47(1H,dd,J=2.7,9.9),6.86(1H,d,J=2.0),7.33-7.46(6H,m),7.71-7.76(4H,m),7.90(1H,d,J=8.6)
LCMS:529.2[M+H];保持時間:6.83分;LCMS条件:B
エチル 6-ヒドロキシ-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-3-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.45(3H,t,J=7.1),1.60-1.76(3H,m),2.03-2.08(2H,m),2.42-2.53(1H,m),3.67-3.75(1H,m),4.01-4.05(1H,m),4.48(2H,q,J=7.1),5.40(1H,brs),5.71(1H,dd,J=2.7,9.7),6.88(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.8),7.07(1H,d,J=2.0),8.03(1H,d,J=8.8)
LCMS:291.2[M+H];保持時間:3.69分;LCMS条件:A
エチル 6-ベンジルオキシ-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-3-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.46(3H,t,J=7.2),1.67~1.78(3H,m),2.04~2.12(2H,m),2.42~2.49(1H,m),3.69~3.75(1H,m),4.01~4.05(1H,m),4.49(2H,q,J=7.2),5.16(2H,s),5.75(1H,dd,J=2.6,9.2),7.04(1H,dd,J=2.2,8.8),7.11(1H,d,J=1.7),7.32~7.49(5H,m),8.06(1H,d,J=8.9)
(6-(ベンジルオキシ)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-3-イル)メタノール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.54~1.79(3H,m),1.98~2.14(2H,m),2.05(1H,t,J=5.9),2.46~2.59(1H,m),3.72~3.77(1H,m),4.02~4.06(1H,m),4.98(2H,d,J=5.9),5.15(2H,s),5.58(1H,dd,J=2.8,9.5),6.91(1H,dd,J=2.2,8.8),6.98(1H,d,J=2.0),7.32~7.49(5H,m),7.65(1H,d,J=8.6)
LCMS:339.0[M+H];保持時間:4.02分;LCMS条件:A
(6-(ベンジルオキシ)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-3-カルバルデヒド
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.66~1.87(3H,m),2.04~2.22(2H,m),2.49~2.61(1H,m),3.71~3.79(1H,m),3.96~4.01(1H,m),5.16(2H,s),5.74(1H,dd,J=3.1,8.8),7.06~7.10(2H,m),7.32~7.49(5H,m),8.15(1H,d,J=9.4),10.19(1H,s)
LCMS:337.3[M+H];保持時間:5.14分;LCMS条件:A
1-(6-(ベンジルオキシ)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-3-イル)エタノール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.64~1.78(6H,m),1.98~2.03(2H,m),2.55~2.58(1H,m),3.68~3.76(1H,m),4.02~4.06(1H,m),5.14(2H,s),5.24~5.28(1H,m),5.55~5.59(1H,m),6.89(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.5),6.98(1H,s),7.31~7.49(5H,m),7.68(1H,dd,J=3.5,8.8)
LCMS:353.2[M+H];保持時間:1.68分;LCMS条件:C
6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.61~1.75(6H,m),1.99~2.04(2H,m),2.47(1H,brs),3.26(3H,d,J=5.9),3.70~3.76(1H,m),4.04~4.08(1H,m),4.72~4.76(1H,m),5.14(2H,s),5.56(1H,d,J=7.7),6.88(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.6),6.99(1H,s),7.31~7.49(5H,m),7.77(1H,d,J=8.6)
LCMS:367.2[M+H];保持時間:1.97分;LCMS条件:C
3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-6-オール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.59~1.78(6H,m),1.99~2.12(2H,m),2.48~2.51(1H,m),3.26(3H,d,J=4.4),3.68~3.76(1H,m),4.05~4.16(1H,m),4.72~4.78(1H,m),5.27(1H,brs),5.51~5.56(1H,m),6.70(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.6),6.92(1H,s),7.74(1H,d,J=8.6)
LCMS:277.1[M+H];保持時間:1.24分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-6-(2-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)フェニル)-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-3-(1-メトキシエチル)-インダゾール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.51~0.59(6H,m),0.87~0.92(9H,m),1.44~1.75(24H,m),2.01~2.13(2H,m),3.49~2.53(1H,m),3.24~3.29(3H,m),3.41~3.75(6H,m),4.06(3H,m),4.71~4.75(3H,m),4.94~5,14(1H,m),5.54~5.57(1H,m),6.73~6.87(2H,m),7.14~7.41(4H,m),7.69~7.74(1H,m)
LCMS:847.4[M+H];保持時間:2.47分;LCMS条件:D
N-(3-((R)-1-ヒドロキシ-2-(2-(3-(1-メトキシエチル)-インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)エチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)1.51(3H,d,J=6.6),2.98(3H,s),3.07~3.25(5H,m),3.45~3.46(2H.m),4.34~4.36(2H,m),4.67(1H,q,J=6.6),4.99(1H,d,J=8.1),6.78(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.8)6.94(1H,d,J=2.0),7.10~7.16(2H,m),7.29~7.36(2H,m),7.70(1H,d,J=8.8)9.00(1H,brs),9.29(1H.brs),9.84(1H,brs)
LCMS:449.1[M+H];保持時間:0.84分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-ヒドロキシエチルアミノ)-1-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.50-0.58(6H,m),0.81-0.91(9H,m),1.81-1.87(2H,m),2.99(3H,s),3.53-3.61(2H,m),3.72-3.76(2H,m),4.77-4.81(1H,m),7.11-7.33(4H,m)
LCMS:389.2[M+H];保持時間:2.65分;LCMS条件:A
(R)-(3-(2-(N-tert-ブトキシカルボニル-N-(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)-1-トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)フェニル)-N-tert-ブトキシカルボニルメタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.49-0.57(6H,m),0.85-0.90(9H,m),1.44(9H,s),1.44-1.53(9H,m),3.03-4.83(9H,m),5.00-5.29(1H,m),7.10-7.42(4H,m)
LCMS:589.2[M+H];保持時間:5.98分;LCMS条件:A
メチル 4-(ベンジルオキシ)-2-フルオロベンゾエート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)3.89(3H,s),5.09(2H,s),6.70(1H,dd,J=2.3,12.6),6.78(1H,dd,J=2.3,8.8),7.31-7.41(5H,m),7.89(1H,t,J=8.6)
6-(ベンジルオキシ)-1,2-ジヒドロインダゾール-3-オン
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)5.13(2H,s),6.66(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.6),6.74(1H,d,J=2.0),7.30-7.48(6H,m)
LCMS:241[M+H];保持時間;3.18分;LCMS条件:A
tert-ブチル 6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-オキソ-2,3-ジヒドロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.70(9H,s),5.15(2H,s),6.96(1H,dd,J=2.0,8.6),7.32-7.60(6H,m),7.68(1H,d,J=8.6)
LCMS:341[M+H];保持時間:4.57分;LCMS条件:A
tert-ブチル 6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.68(9H,s),5.15(2H,s),7.02(1H,dd,J=2.2,8.8),7.32-7.60(5H,m),7.36(1H,t,J=72.0),7.56(1H,d,J=8.8),7.63(1H,brs)
LCMS:391[M+H];保持時間:5.97分;LCMS条件:A
tert-ブチル 3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.68(9H,s),6.08(1H,brs),6.89(1H,dd,J=2.2,8.6),7.34(1H,t,J=72.0),7.48(1H,brs),7.54(1H,d,J=8.6)
LCMS:301[M+H];保持時間:4.04分;LCMS条件:A
インダゾール-6-オール
1H-NMR(DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)6.64(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.8),6.78(1H,dd,J=0.7,1.8),7.52(1H,d,J=8.8),7.86(1H,d,J=0.7),9.54(1H,s),12.56(1H,s)
LCMS:134[M+H];保持時間;0.72分;LCMS条件:C
6-tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシインダゾール
1H-NMR(CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.11(9H,s),6.66-6.67(1H,m),6.78(1H,dd,J=2.0、8.8),7.33-7.45(6H,m),7.48(1H,dd,J=0.5,8.8),7.71-7.74(4H,m),7.88(1H,s)
LCMS:373[M+H];保持時間:5.88分;LCMS条件:A
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール
1H-NMR(CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.11(9H,s),6.60(1H,d,J=2.1),6.83(1H,dd,J=2.1,8.7),7.33-7.46(6H,m),7.69-7.74(5H,m),9.53(1H,brs)
LCMS:407[M+H];保持時間:2.44分;LCMS条件:C
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.11(9H,s),1.71(9H,s),6.82(1H,d,J=8.7),7.34-7.43(6H,m),7.69-7.72(6H,m)
tert-ブチル 3-クロロ-6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.68(9H,s),6.03(1H,s),6.95(1H,dd,J=2.1,8.7),7.53(1H,d,J=8.7),7.60(1H,d,J=2.1)
LCMS:269[M+H];保持時間:1.60分;LCMS条件:C
ベンジル 2-ブロモエチルカルバメート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)3.47(2H,t,J=5.8),3.60(2H,t,J=5.8),5.11(2H,s),7.27-7.40(5H,m)
LCMS:258[M+H];保持時間:1.42分;LCMS条件:C
ベンジル 2-(1-ベンジル-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルカルバメート
LCMS:442[M+H];保持時間:5.04分;LCMS条件:A
2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エタンアミン
LCMS:218[M+H];保持時間:0.46分,1.68分(二峰性);LCMS条件:A
(R)-N-(2-フルオロ-5-(オキシラン-2-イル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3)2.75(1H,dd,J=2.5,5.3),3.04(1H,s),3.14(1H,dd,J=4.0,5.3),3.85(1H,dd,J=2.5,4.0),6.58(1H,brs),7.04-7.19(2H,m),7.50(1H,dd,J=2.0,7.5)
LCMS:232[M+H];保持時間:0.96分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(オキシラン-2-イル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)3.03(3H,s),3.38(1H,dd,J=8.0,10.4),3.50(1H,dd,J=3.8,10.4),4.80(1H,dt,J=3.8,10.4),6.81(1H,brs),7.20(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.4),7.43(1H,d,J=8.4),7.65(1H,d,J=1.8)
LCMS:248[M+H];保持時間:1.09分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-N-(5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)-2-フルオロフェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
LCMS:449[M+H];保持時間:0.92分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
LCMS:465[M+H];保持時間:0.95分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 5-(2-(ベンジル(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)-1-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)-2-フルオロフェニル(メタンスルホニル)カルバメート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.41-0.63(6H,m),0.82-0.99(9H,m),1.42-1.44(9H,m),2.59-2.83(4H,m),3.42-3.43(3H,m),3.45-3.86(4H,m),4.54-4.67(1H,m),7.04-7.12(1H,m),7.19-7.37(7H,m)
LCMS:597[M+H];保持時間:0.76分;LCMS条件:D
(R)-tert-ブチル 2-フルオロ-5-(2-(2-ヒドロキシエチルアミノ)-1-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)フェニル(メチルスルホニル)カルバメート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.55(6H,q,J=7.6),0.88(9H,t,J=7.6),1.43(9H,s),2.68-2.83(4H,m),3.42(3H,s),3.57(2H,t,J=5.1),4.77(1H,dt,J=2.5,4.7),7.11(1H,t,J=9.1),7.34-7.36(2H,m)
LCMS:507[M+H];保持時間:1.56分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-(2-フルオロ-5-(2-(N-tert-ブトキシカルボニル-N-(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)-1-トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)フェニル)-N-tert-ブトキシカルボニルメタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.53(6H,q,J=8.0),0.87(9H,t,J=8.0),1.44(9H,s),1.48-1.58(9H,m),3.08-3.65(6H,m),3.42(3H,s),4.98-5.24(1H,m),7.12(1H,t,J=9.1),7.31-7.38(2H,m)
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)-4-フルオロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.49-0.57(6H,m),0.87(9H,t,J=8.0),1.43(9H,s),1.47-1.51(9H,m),1.70(9H,s),2.13-2.19(2H,m),2.42-2.59(4H,m),3.28-3.57(4H,m),3.42(3H,s),3.87(1H,qu,J=8.4),4.03-4.09(2H,m),4.91-5.09(1H,m),6.84(1H,d,J=8.7),7.11(1H,dt,J=4.7,9.1),7.33-7.36(2H,m),7.51-7.53(2H,m)
(R)-N-(5-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)-2-フルオロフェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)1.89-2.14(2H,m),2.34-2.39(4H,m),3.04(3H,s),3.05-3.10(1H,m),3.25-3.27(1H,m),3.45(2H,brs),3.86(1H,qu,J=8.4),4.35-4.37(2H,m),5.05(1H,d,J=7.6),6.78(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.7),6.92(1H,d,J=1.8),7.25-7.35(2H,m),7.46(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.0),7.65(1H,d,J=8.7),9.09(1H,brs),9.38(1H,brs),9.70(1H,s)
LCMS:463[M+H];保持時間:1.04分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)-4-フルオロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
LCMS:889[M+H];保持時間:7.77分;LCMS条件:B
(R)-N-(5-(2-(2-(3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)-2-フルオロフェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)3.04(3H,s),3.09-3.13(1H,m),3.26-3.30(1H,m),3.45-3.46(2H,m),4.38(2H,t,J=5.1),5.02(1H,d,J=7.6),6.84(1H,dd,J=1.8,9.1),6.93(1H,d,J=1.8),7.24-7.35(2H,m),7.46(1H,dd,J=1.4,9.1),7.47(1H,t,J=73.3),7.56(1H,d,J=9.1),9.02(1H,brs),9.24(1H,brs),9.69(1H,s),12.55(1H,s)
LCMS:475[M+H];保持時間:0.95分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-N-(5-(2-(ベンジル(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)-1-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)-2-クロロフェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.44-0.53(6H,m),0.85(9H,t,J=8.0),2.53-2.84(4H,m),2.99(3H,s),3.37(2H,t,J=5.4),3.68(2H,d,J=2.1),4.55(1H,t,J=6.5),7.08(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.4),7.19-7.34(5H,m),7.36(1H,d,J=8.4),7.58(1H,d,J=1.8)
LCMS:513[M+H];保持時間:1.54分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 5-(2-(ベンジル(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)-1-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)-2-クロロフェニル(メチルスルホニル)カルバメート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.42-0.53(6H,m),0.82-0.90(9H,m),1.41-1.43(9H,m),2.51-2.80(4H,m),3.42-3.50(2H,m),3.51-3.53(3H,m),4.51-4.59(1H,m),7.12-7.37(8H,m)
LCMS:613[M+H];保持時間:1.03分;LCMS条件:D
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(ベンジル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)-4-クロロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.46(6H,q,J=8.0),0.83(9H,t,J=8.0),1.37(9H,s),1.70(9H,s),2.02-2.17(2H,m),2.43-2.60(4H,m),2.79-2.90(4H,m),3.44-3.49(3H,m),3.75-3.96(5H,m),4.58(1H,brs),6.81(1H,brs),7.18-7.31(8H,m),7.31-7.47(1H,m),7.53(1H,d,J=8.7)
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)-4-クロロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
LCMS:893[M+H];保持時間:8.78分;LCMS条件:B
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)1.90-2.14(2H,m),2.33-2.41(4H,m),3.46(3H,s),3.10-3.28(2H,m),3.46-3.48(2H,m),3.85(1H,qu,J=8.4),4.34-4.35(2H,m),5.05(1H,d,J=7.6),6.76(1H,dd,1.8,8.7),6.91(1H,d,J=1.8,2.1),7.29(1H,d,J=1.8,8.4),7.51(1H,d,J=1.8),7.55(1H,d,J=8.4),7.63(1H,d,J=8.7),9.04(1H,brs),9.26(1H,brs),9.54(1H,s)
LCMS:479[M+H];保持時間:1.04分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(ベンジル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)-4-クロロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.42-0.50(6H,m),0.83(9H,t,J=8.0),1.38(9H,s),1.68-1.69(9H,m),2.75-2.95(4H,m),3.47-3.50(3H,m),3.71-3.96(4H,m),4.59-4.60(1H,m),6.84-6.91(1H,m),7.22-7.31(8H,m),7.36(1H,t,J=72.2),7.43(1H,d,J=1.8),7.53(1H,d,J=8.7)
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル(2-(3-(N-(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)メチルスルホンアミド)-4-クロロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.49-0.58(6H,m),0.85-0.97(9H,m),1.42(9H,s),1.47-1.51(9H,m),1.67(9H,s),3.21-3.64(4H,m),3.51(3H,s),4.03-4.07(2H,m),4.92-5.11(1H,m),6.87-6.91(1H,m),7.29-7.59(5H,m),7.42(1H,t,J=71.8)
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド
1H-NMR(300MHz,DMSO-d6);δ(ppm)3.05(3H,s),3.07-3.33(2H,m),3.46-3.49(2H,m),4.35-4.37(2H,m),5.02(1H,d,J=10.2),6.36(1H,d,J=4.0),6.84(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.7),6.92(1H,d,J=1.8),7.29(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.4,8.7),7.47(1H,t,J=73.3),7.51-7.58(3H,m),8.97(1H,brs),9.10(1H,brs),9.55(1H,s),12.52(1H,s)
LCMS:491[M+H];保持時間:1.03分;LCMS条件:C
N-ベンジル-2-(ベンジルオキシ)エタンアミン
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)2.84(2H,t,J=5.1),3.62(2H,t,J=5.1),3.80(2H,s),4.52(2H,s),7.20-7.37(10H,m)
(R)-2-(ベンジル(2-(ベンジルオキシ)エチル)アミノ)-1-(3-ニトロフェニル)エタノール
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)2.61(1H,dd,J=3.2,10.2),2.75-3.01(3H,m),3.51-3.63(2H,m),3.78(2H,dd,J=13.5,68.9),4.53(2H,s),4.70(1H,dd,J=3.2,10.2),7.27-7.39(10H,m),7.44(1H,t,J=8.0),7.59(1H,d,J=8.0),8.08(1H,qd,J=1.1,8.0),8.16(1H,d,J=1.1)
LCMS:407[M+H];保持時間:1.31分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-N-ベンジル-N-(2―(ベンジルオキシ)エチル)-2-(3-ニトロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エタンアミン
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.44-0.53(6H,m),0.85(9H,t,J=8.0),2.67-2.85(4H,m),3.40-3.45(2H,m),3.62(2H,dd,J=13.5,42.8),4.42(2H,s),4.68(1H,dd,J=7.3),7.05-7.36(10H,m),7.56(1H,d,J=7.6),8.02-8.06(1H,m),8.11-8.12(1H,m)
(R)-tert-ブチル 2-(3-アミノフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル(2-ヒドロキシエチル)カルバメート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.43-0.57(6H,m),0.87(9H,t,J=8.0),1.48-1.50(9H,m),2.04-3.86(6H,m),4.08-5.19(1H,m),6.57-6.77(3H,m),7.09(1H,t,J=7.6)
LCMS:411[M+H];保持時間:2.03分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.53(6H,q,J=8.0),0.88(9H,t,J=8.0),1.02-1.09(2H,m),1.15-1.20(2H,m),1.47(9H,s),1.68(9H,s),2.12-2.19(1H,m),3.37-3.77(4H,m),4.03-4.11(2H,m),4.79-4.99(1H,m),6.56-6.87(4H,m),7.08(1H,t,J=7.6),7.49-7.52(2H,m)
LCMS:667[M+H];保持時間:2.06分;LCMS条件:E
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.48-0.57(6H,m),0.87(9H,t,J=8.0),1.47(9H,s),1.69(9H,s),2.01-2.17(2H,m),2,42-2.59(4H,m),3.20-3.72(4H,m),3.87(1H,qu,J=8.7),4.03-4.12(2H,m),4.79-4.96(1H,m),6.56-6.87(4H,m),7.08(1H,t,J=7.6),7.50-7.53(2H,m)
LCMS:681[M+H];保持時間:2.28分;LCMS条件:E
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.55(6H,q,J=8.0),0.88(9H,t,J=8.0),1.48-1.49(9H,m),1.67(9H,s),3.14-3.75(4H,m),4.01-4.11(2H,m),4.80-4.99(1H,m),6.57-6.92(4H,m),7.09(1H,t,J=7.6),7.35(1H,t,J=72.2),7.48-7.54(2H,m)
LCMS:693[M+H];保持時間:7.24分;LCMS条件:B
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.56(6H,q,J=8.0),0.88(9H,t,J=8.0),1.48(9H,s),1.69(9H,s),3.15-3.77(4H,m),4.06-4.13(2H,m),4.80-4.99(1H,m),6.58-6.79(3H,m),6.92-6.95(1H,m),7.09(1H,t,J=7.6),7.50(1H,dd,J=2.9,8.7),7.57(1H,s)
LCMS:661[M+H];保持時間:2.22分;LCMS条件:E
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)ベンゼンスルホンアミド
LCMS:493[M+H];保持時間:0.97分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシエチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレートの代わりにreagent-1、ベンゼンスルホニル クロリドの代わりにreagent-2を用いて実施例10と同様の方法にて表1の化合物(Compound)の塩酸塩を得た。
「ex」は実施例番号を意味し、例えば、ex11は実施例11を示している。
「ref」は参考例番号を意味し、例えばref-61は参考例61を示している。
「LCMS」は液体クロマトグラフ質量分析スペクトルのデータを示す(m/z)。具体的には、後述の「method」、「R.T.」、「MS」からなる。
「MS」はマススペクトルのデータを意味している。「R.T.」はLCMSにおける保持時間を意味しており、単位は分である。「method」は前述のLCMS条件を意味しており、例えば「C」と記載したものは(LCMS-C)の条件を示している。
RSO2Cl-1は和光純薬社製、RSO2Cl-2は東京化成工業社製、RSO2Cl-3はAldrich社製、RSO2Cl-4はAldrich社製、RSO2Cl-5はAldrich社製を用いた。
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)プロパン-2-スルホンアミド
LCMS:485[M+H];保持時間:1.06分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシエチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレートの代わりにreagent-1を用いて実施例25と同様の方法にて表2の化合物(Compound)の塩酸塩を得た。
「ex」は実施例番号を意味し、例えば、ex26は実施例26を示している。
「ref」は参考例番号を意味し、例えばref-63は参考例63を示している。
「LCMS」は液体クロマトグラフ質量分析スペクトルのデータを示す(m/z)。具体的には、後述の「method」、「R.T.」、「MS」からなる。
「MS」はマススペクトルのデータを意味している。「R.T.」はLCMSにおける保持時間を意味しており、単位は分である。「method」は前述のLCMS条件を意味しており、例えば「C」と記載したものは(LCMS-C)の条件を示している。
RSO2Cl-6は東京化成工業社製を用いた。
2-クロロ-1-(4-フルオロ-3-ニトロフェニル)エタノン
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)4.66(2H,s),7.46(1H,dd,J=8.7,9.8),8.28(1H,ddd,J=2.1,4.0,8.7),8.67(1H,dd,J=2.1,7.3)
(R)-2-(4-フルオロ-3-ニトロフェニル)オキシラン
光学分割条件[カラム;As-H(ダイセル社製)、移動層;ヘキサン:エタノール=90:10、流速;0.5mL/min、検出UV;254nM、温度;40℃]
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)2.76(1H,dd,J=2.5,5.4),3.20(1H,dd,J=4.0,5.4),3.92(1H,dd,J=2.5,4.0),7.28(1H,dd,J=8.4,10.2),7.54(1H,ddd,J=2.1,4.0,8.4),7.99(1H,dd,J=2.1,6.9)
tert-ブチル 3-クロロ-6-(2-(ジベンジルアミノ)エトキシ)インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
LCMS:492[M+H];保持時間:2.29分;LCMS条件:C
tert-ブチル 6-(2-ベンジルアミノ)エトキシ)3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.70(9H,s),3.08(2H,t,J=5.1),3.89(2H,s),4.17-4.21(2H,m),6.98(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.7),7.27-7.37(5H,m),7.53(1H,d,J=8.7),7.63(1H,d,J=1.8)
LCMS:402[M+H];保持時間:1.29分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(ベンジル(2-(4-フルオロ-3-ニトロフェニル)-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.70(9H,s),2.65(1H,dd,J=10.2,12.8),2.92(1H,dd,J=3.2,12.8),3.03-3.23(2H,m),3.86(2H,dd,J=13.5,68.9),4.08-4.18(2H,m),4.71(1H,dd,J=3.2,10.2),7.00(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.7),7.21(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.7),7.27-7.33(5H,m),7.54-7.63(3H,m),8.00(1H,dd,J=2.1,6.9)
LCMS:585[M+H];保持時間:2.05分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノ-4-フルオロフェニル)-2-ヒドロキシエチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.49(9H,s),1.70(9H,s),3.36-3.74(4H,m),4.11-4.32(2H,m),4.90(1H,brs),6.68-6.97(4H,m),7.53(1H,d,J=8.7),7.62(1H,brs)
LCMS:565[M+H];保持時間:2.05分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノ-4-フルオロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.52(6H,q,J=8.0),0.88(9H,q,J=8.0),1.47(9H,s),1.69(9H,s),3.12-3.76(4H,m),4.06-4.12(2H,m),4.77-4.97(1H,m),6.57-6.96(4H,m),7.51(1H,dd,J=2.1,8.4),7.58(1H,s)
LCMS:679[M+H];保持時間:2.29分;LCMS条件:E
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-(ベンジル(2-(4-クロロ-3-ニトロフェニル)-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1.70(9H,s),2.64(1H,dd,J=10.2,13.1),2.92(1H,dd,J=3.6,13.1),3.01-3.23(2H,m),3.85(2H,dd,J=13.5,67.8),4.06-4.19(2H,m),4.70(1H,dd,J=3.6,10.2),6.98(1H,dd,J=2.1,8.7),7.27-7.35(5H,m),7.42-7.49(2H,m),7.56(1H,d,J=8.7),7.62(1H,d,J=2.1),7.83(1H,d,J=1.4)
LCMS:601[M+H];保持時間:5.88分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノ-4-クロロフェニル)-2-ヒドロキシエチル)(ベンジル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
LCMS:571[M+H];保持時間:2.02分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノ-4-クロロフェニル)-2-ヒドロキシエチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)1・48(9H,s),1.70(9H,s)3.33-3.76(4H,m),4.06-4.24(2H,m),4.90(1H,brs),6.68-6.97(3H,m),7.20(1H,d,J=8.0),7.53(1H,d,J=8.7),8.04(1H,brs)
LCMS:581[M+H];保持時間:2.14分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-tert-ブチル 6-(2-((2-(3-アミノ-4-クロロフェニル)-2-(トリエチルシリルオキシ)エチル)(tert-ブトキシカルボニル)アミノ)エトキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート
1H-NMR(300MHz,CDCl3);δ(ppm)0.53(6H,q,J=7.6),0.88(9H,t,J=7.6),1.46-1.47(9H,m),1.69(9H,s),3.11-3.77(4H,m),4.03-4.12(2H,m),4.77-4.98(1H,m),6.59-6.95(3H,m),7.17(1H,d,J=8.0),7.51(1H,dd,J=1.8,8.7),7.58(1H,s)
LCMS:694[M+H];保持時間:2.56分;LCMS条件:E
(R)-N-(5-(2-(2-(3-クロロインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)-2-フルオロフェニル)ベンゼンスルホンアミド
LCMS:505[M+H];保持時間:1.05分;LCMS条件:C
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-クロロインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)ベンゼンスルホンアミド
LCMS:521[M+H];保持時間:1.16分;LCMS条件:C
ヒトβ3アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトβ3アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性は、ヒトβ3遺伝子をpcDNA3(In vitrogen)に挿入したものをトランスフェクトしたCHO(チャイニーズハムスター卵巣)細胞を用いて行う。ヒトβ3遺伝子は、まずβ3のプライマー(Kriefら、J.Clin.Invest.、Vol.91、pp.344-349(1993))でヒト脂肪組織cDNA(クローンテック社製)を用いPCRによりヒトβ3断片を得、これをプローブとしてヒトゲノミックライブラリー(クローンテック社製)より全長のヒトβ3遺伝子を得る。この細胞を10%ウシ胎児血清、400μg/mlジェネチシン(Invitrogen)、を含むハムF-12培地で培養する。1×105 cells/wellになるように、この細胞を24穴プレートに播種し、約20時間培養後、無血清のハムF-12培地で2時間放置する。被験化合物を最初DMSOで溶かした後、20mmol/L HEPES、1mmol/Lイソブチルメチルキサンチン、及び1mmol/Lアスコルビン酸を含むハムF-12で段階希釈し、細胞に加える。30分培養後、培地を抜き取り、1N NaOHを0.1ml加え、20分放置する。1N 酢酸を0.1ml加え、撹拌後遠心をし、cAMP-EIAキット(ケイマン社製)でcAMPの定量を行う。陽性対照であるイソプロテレノール(isoproterenol)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をIntrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトβ3アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトβ3アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性は、ヒトβ3遺伝子をpcDNA3(Invitrogen)に挿入したものをトランスフェクトしたCHO(チャイニーズハムスター卵巣)細胞を用いて行う。ヒトβ3遺伝子は、まずβ3のプライマー(Kriefら、J.Clin.Invest.、Vol.91、pp344-349(1993))でヒト脂肪組織cDNA(クローンテック社製)を用いPCRによりヒトβ3断片を得、これをプローブとしてヒトゲノミックライブラリー(クローンテック社製)より全長のヒトβ3遺伝子を得る。この細胞を10%ウシ胎児血清、400μg/mlジェネチシン(Invitrogen)、を含むハムF-12培地で培養する。2×104 cells/wellになるように、この細胞を96穴プレートに播種し、約20時間培養後、無血清のハムF-12培地80uLで15分間放置する。被験化合物を最初DMSOで溶かした後、100mmol/L HEPES、1mmol/Lイソブチルメチルキサンチンを含むハムF-12で段階希釈し、20uLを細胞に加える。30分培養後、培地を抜き取り、cAMP-Screenキット(アプライドバイオシステムズ社製)に含まれるAssay/lysis Bufferを 0.1ml加え、30分間、37度でインキュベートする。このCell Lysateを、上記のcAMP-ScreenキットでcAMPの定量を行う。陽性対照であるイソプロテレノール(isoproterenol)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をIntrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトβ1アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトβ1アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性は、ヒトβ1遺伝子をpcDNA3(In vitrogen)に挿入したものをトランスフェクトしたCHO(チャイニーズハムスター卵巣)細胞を用いて、試験例1-Aの測定と同様の方法で行う。陽性対照であるイソプロテレノール(isoproterenol)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をIntrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトβ1アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトβ1アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性は、ヒトβ1遺伝子をpcDNA3(In vitrogen)に挿入したものをトランスフェクトしたCHO(チャイニーズハムスター卵巣)細胞を用いて、試験例1-Bの測定と同様の方法で行う。陽性対照であるイソプロテレノール(isoproterenol)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をIntrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトβ2アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトβ2アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性は、ヒトβ2遺伝子をpcDNA3(In vitrogen)に挿入したものをトランスフェクトしたCHO(チャイニーズハムスター卵巣)細胞を用いて、試験例1-Aの測定と同様の方法で行う。陽性対照であるイソプロテレノール(isoproterenol)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をIntrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトβ2アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトβ2アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性は、ヒトβ2遺伝子をpcDNA3(In vitrogen)に挿入したものをトランスフェクトしたCHO(チャイニーズハムスター卵巣)細胞を用いて、試験例1-Bの測定と同様の方法で行う。陽性対照であるイソプロテレノール(isoproterenol)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をIntrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトα1Aアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトα1Aアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性は、ヒトα1A遺伝子をpcDNA3.1(-)(Invitrogen)に挿入したものをトランスフェクトしたHEK293細胞を用いて行う。この細胞を10%ウシ胎児血清、400μg/mlハイグロマイシンB(GibcoBRL)、100U/mlペニシリン、100μg/mlストレプトマイシンを含むDMEM培地で培養した後、0.2%Pluronic F-127(Invitrogen)及び20μmol/L Fura-2AM(和光純薬工業社製)含有アッセイバッファー(20mmol/L HEPES-KOH(pH7.4)、115mmol/L NaCl、5.4mmol/L KCl、0.8mmol/L MgCl2、1.8mmol/L CaCl2、13.8mmol/L D-glucose、0.1%bovine serum albumin)で5´
106cells/mlに調製する。CO2incubator中で30分間ローディングをおこなった後、アッセイバッファーで2回洗浄して過剰のFura-2AMを除去する。遠心後の細胞をアッセイバッファーで5´
106cells/mlに調製後、96穴UVプレート(コーニング社製)に80μl/wellで分注し、細胞プレートとする。アッセイバッファーで10-5から10-12Mまで10倍希釈した被験化合物を添加したサンプルプレート及び細胞プレートをFDSS4000(浜松ホトニクス社製)にセットし、180秒間プレインキュベーション後、2秒間隔で蛍光強度の測定(励起波長340nm、380nm、測定波長500nm)を開始する。約30秒間の測定後、サンプルプレートから20μlの被験サンプルを細胞プレートに添加し、更に270秒測定を続ける。被験化合物によるCa fluxは、被験化合物添加後の340nmと380nmの蛍光強度比の最大値と、被験化合物添加前の蛍光強度比の差をpeak heightとして計算する。陽性対照であるノルエピネフリン(Norephinephrine)の最大反応を100%として、各披験化合物の最大反応の比率をIntrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトα1Bアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトα1Bアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定は、ヒトα1B遺伝子をpcDNA3.1(Invitrogen)に挿入したものとルシフェラーゼ遺伝子発現ベクターのpSRE-Luc.プラスミド(Stratagene)をHEK293細胞に一過性にトランスフェクションして行う。40,000cells/wellで96穴プレートに播種し、2%ウシ胎児血清含むDMEM培地で、37℃、5%CO2の条件下で一晩培養する。被験化合物をDMSOで溶かした後、培地で希釈したものを細胞に加え数時間反応させる。培地を吸引除去し、30μl/wellのピッカジーンLT2.0(東洋インキ)を加え、30分後の発光値を測定する。陽性対照であるフェニレフェリン(Phenylephrine)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をInstrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
ヒトα1Dアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定
ヒトα1Dアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性の測定は、ヒトα1D遺伝子をpcDNA3.1(Invitrogen)に挿入したものとルシフェラーゼ遺伝子発現ベクターのpSRE-Luc.プラスミド(Stratagene)をHEK293細胞に一過性にトランスフェクションして行う。40,000cells/wellで96穴プレートに播種し、2%ウシ胎児血清含むDMEM培地で、37℃,5%CO2の条件下で一晩培養する。被験化合物をDMSOで溶かした後、培地で希釈したものを細胞に加え数時間反応させる。培地を吸引除去し、30μl/wellのピッカジーンLT2.0(東洋インキ)を加え、30分後の発光値を測定する。陽性対照であるフェニレフェリン(Phenylephrine)の最大反応を100%として、各被験化合物の最大反応の比率をInstrinsic Activity[I.A.(%)]として算出する。また、反応率が50%となる薬液濃度(EC50)も求める。
β3receptorとはヒトβ3アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表し、β1receptorとはヒトβ1アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表し、β2receptorとはヒトβ2アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表し、α1Areceptorとはヒトα1Aアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表す。
EC50、IAとは上記の試験例1-A、試験例2-A、試験例3-A、又は試験例4に記載した意味と同義である。
なお、表3中のNとは例数のことである。具体的にはA;n=3,triplicate、B;n=2,triplicate、C;n=1,duplicate、D;n=4,triplicate、E;n=3,duplicate、F;n=2,duplicate、G;n=1,triplicateを意味する。
compoundとは被験化合物を意味する。exとは実施例を意味し、例えばex1は実施例1を示している。Zは比較例を意味し、例えばZ1は比較例1を示している。比較例は国際公開番号第WO03/035620号パンフレットに記載されている化合物で、比較例1は当該国際公開公報の実施例86、比較例2は実施例88、比較例3は実施例90である。
β3receptorとはヒトβ3アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表し、β1receptorとはヒトβ1アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表し、β2receptorとはヒトβ2アドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表し、α1Areceptorとはヒトα1Aアドレナリン受容体アゴニスト活性を表す。
EC50、IAとは上記の試験例1-B、試験例2-B、試験例3-B、又は試験例4に記載した意味と同義である。
なお、表4中のNとは例数のことである。具体的にはA;n=3,triplicate、B;n=2,triplicate、C;n=1,duplicate、D;n=4,triplicate、E;n=3,duplicate、F;n=2,duplicate、G;n=1,triplicateを意味する。
compoundとは被験化合物を意味する。exとは実施例を意味し、例えばex1は実施例1を示している。Zは比較例を意味し、例えばZ1は比較例1を示している。比較例は国際公開番号第WO03/035620号パンフレットに記載されている化合物で、比較例1は当該国際公開公報の実施例86、比較例2は実施例88、比較例3は実施例90である。
コモンマーモセット摘出膀胱平滑筋弛緩作用試験
Buritish Journal of Pharmacology、1997年、122号、1720-1724貢を参考に試験を行い、被験化合物のコモンマーモセット摘出膀胱平滑筋弛緩作用を確認することができる。コモンマーモセット(日本クレア株式会社)を放血致死後、開腹して膀胱を摘出する。摘出した膀胱から平滑筋標本を作製し、95%O2と5%CO2の混合ガスを通気した10mLのKrebs-Henseleit液で満たしたオルガンバス中に懸垂する。標本に1gの静止張力を負荷し、30分以上安定させる。標本の静止張力が安定した後、終濃度40mmol/L KClを繰り返し添加し、KClに対する収縮がほぼ一定となることを確認する。終濃度40mmol/LのKClにより標本を収縮させ、発生張力が安定した後に、被験化合物を(20分間隔で)10倍比で累積添加し、弛緩反応を観察する。終濃度は、10-9、10-8、10-7、10-6、10-5及び10-4mol/Lとする。被験化合物の最高濃度の弛緩反応の終了後、終濃度10-4mol/Lのpapaverineを添加して、各標本の最大弛緩反応を求める。その弛緩反応を100%として被験化合物濃度が10-5及び10-4mol/Lの弛緩率(%)を算出する。
ヒト摘出膀胱平滑筋弛緩作用試験
The Journal of Urology、2003年、170号、649-653貢を参考に試験を行い、被験化合物のヒト摘出膀胱平滑筋弛緩作用を確認することができる。すなわち、ヒト摘出膀胱から得た平滑筋標本を95%O2 と5%CO2の混合ガスを通気したKrebs-Henselit液で満たしたオルガンバス中に懸垂する。平滑筋標本に1gの静止張力を負荷し、30分以上安定させる。標本の静止張力が安定した後、終濃度0.1μmol/Lのcarbacholを繰り返し添加し、carbacholに対する収縮がほぼ一定となることを確認する。終濃度0.1μmol/Lのcarbacholにより標本を収縮させ、発生張力が安定した後に、被験化合物を10分間隔で10倍比で累積添加し、弛緩反応を観察する。終濃度は、10-9、10-8、10-7、10-6、10-5及び10-4mol/Lとする。被験化合物の最高濃度の弛緩反応の終了後、終濃度10-4mol/Lのpapaverineを添加して、各標本の最大弛緩反応を求める。その弛緩反応を100%として弛緩率を算出する。
ペントバルビタール麻酔下ラットの血圧・心拍数に及ぼす影響
ペントバルビタール麻酔下ラットの血圧、心拍数を測定し、被験化合物の静脈内急速投与による血圧、心拍数に及ぼす影響を検討することができる。雄性SD系ラット(日本SLC株式会社)にペントバルビタールナトリウム(東京化成工業株式会社)50mg/kgを腹腔内投与して麻酔を導入した後、維持麻酔としてペントバルビタールナトリウム25mg/kgを皮下投与する。左大腿静脈を露出、剥離した後、生理食塩液で満たしたポリエチレンチューブSP10(1/4静脈針を介して三方活栓に接続)を挿入して静脈内に留置する。
純水の飽和溶解度
被験化合物を純水中、飽和状態になるように調製する。その液を室温で1時間、振とうする。フィルターチューブに振とう後の溶液を全量移し入れ、室温で遠心ろ過する。ろ液をHPLCにて分析を行い、ピークのエリア値から検量線を用いて被験化合物の飽和溶解度を求める。
pH1.2塩酸緩衝液中の溶解度試験
被験化合物は500μg精秤し、1000μg/mLになるようにpH1.2塩酸緩衝液を加える。その液を37℃で1時間、振とうする。フィルターチューブに振とう後の溶液を全量移し入れ、室温で遠心ろ過する。ろ液をHPLCにて分析を行い、ろ液のピークのエリア値を標準溶液のピークのエリア値で割り、被験化合物の溶解度を求める。
生理食塩水中の溶解度試験
pH1.2塩酸緩衝液を生理食塩水に変える以外は試験例11と同様の試験を行い、被験化合物の溶解度を求める。
純水中の安定性試験
被験化合物を純水中、飽和状態になるように調製する。その液を室温で1時間、振とうする。フィルターチューブに振とう後の溶液を全量移し入れ、室温で遠心ろ過する。ろ液を直後、24時間後、48時間後それぞれHPLCにて分析を行い、ピークのエリア値から検量線を用いて被験化合物の安定性を求める。
pH6.8リン酸衝液中の安定性試験
純水をpH6.8リン酸衝液に変える以外は試験例13と同様の試験を行い、被験化合物の安定性を求める。
Claims (22)
- 下記一般式(A-1)
- G1が-OCHF2、ハロゲン原子、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、G2はメチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ベンジル基、又はフェニル基であり、G3は水素原子、フッ素原子、又は塩素原子であり;ただし、G1がハロゲン原子のときは、G2がメチル基であり、且つ、G3が水素原子、又はハロゲン原子である化合物、及びG1が-OCHF2のときは、G2がメチル基であり、且つ、G3が水素原子である化合物は除く、請求項1に記載の化合物又はその塩。
- G1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基である請求項1に記載の化合物又はその塩。
- R1が、-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基である請求項2に記載の化合物又はその塩。
- *で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である請求項1に記載の化合物又はその塩。
- *で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である請求項2に記載の化合物又はその塩。
- *で示される不斉炭素の立体配置が(R)配置である請求項3に記載の化合物又はその塩。
- (R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-(1-メトキシエチル)インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)-2-フルオロフェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;及び
(R)-N-(2-クロロ-5-(2-(2-(3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。 - (R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-(1-メトキシエチル)インダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;及び
(R)-N-(3-(2-(2-(3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-イルオキシ)エチルアミノ)-1-ヒドロキシエチル)フェニル)メタンスルホンアミド;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。 - 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の化合物又はその塩を有効成分として含有するβ3アドレナリン受容体作動薬。
- 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の化合物又はその塩を有効成分として含有する医薬。
- 過活動膀胱並びに尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療剤である請求項12に記載の医薬。
- 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の化合物又はその塩を、過活動膀胱並びに尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療の必要のある患者に投与することを特徴とする、患者の生体内でβ3アドレナリン受容体を作動する方法。
- 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の化合物又はその塩の有効量を患者に投与することを特徴とする過活動膀胱並びに尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療方法。
- 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の化合物又はその塩の有効量を患者に投与することを特徴とする尿失禁の予防及び/又は治療方法。
- J1は-CH(Me)OMe、-OCHF2、塩素原子、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、J2は水素原子、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基、ベンジル基、又はテトラヒドロピラニル基であり、J3は水素原子、ベンジル基、又はtert-ブチルジフェニルシリル基である請求項17記載の化合物又はその塩。
- R1は-CH(Me)OMe、シクロプロピル基、又はシクロブチル基であり、P1は水素原子、tert-ブトキシカルボニル基、ベンジル基、又はテトラヒドロピラニル基を表し、P2は水素原子、ベンジル基、又はtert-ブチルジフェニルシリル基を表す請求項18記載の化合物又はその塩。
- 1-ベンジル-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
1-ベンジル-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール;
3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-6-オール;
tert-ブチル 6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-インダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 3-(ジフルオロメトキシ)-6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-クロロインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;及び
tert-ブチル 3-クロロ-6-ヒドロキシインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。 - 1-ベンジル-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロプロピルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
1-ベンジル-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
3-シクロブチルインダゾール-6-オール;
6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール;
tert-ブチル 6-(tert-ブチルジフェニルシリルオキシ)-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
tert-ブチル 6-ヒドロキシ-3-シクロブチルインダゾール-1-カルボキシレート;
6-(ベンジルオキシ)-3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール;及び
3-(1-メトキシエチル)-1-(テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イル)-インダゾール-6-オール;
からなる群より選ばれた化合物又はその塩。
Priority Applications (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2010532879A JPWO2010041568A1 (ja) | 2008-10-09 | 2009-09-29 | インダゾール誘導体 |
CN2009801390168A CN102171191A (zh) | 2008-10-09 | 2009-09-29 | 吲唑衍生物 |
AU2009301797A AU2009301797B2 (en) | 2008-10-09 | 2009-09-29 | Indazole derivative |
EP09819103A EP2351742A4 (en) | 2008-10-09 | 2009-09-29 | indazole |
CA2737349A CA2737349A1 (en) | 2008-10-09 | 2009-09-29 | Indazole derivatives |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US10402408P | 2008-10-09 | 2008-10-09 | |
US61/104,024 | 2008-10-09 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2010041568A1 true WO2010041568A1 (ja) | 2010-04-15 |
Family
ID=42100520
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2009/066895 WO2010041568A1 (ja) | 2008-10-09 | 2009-09-29 | インダゾール誘導体 |
Country Status (8)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US8304443B2 (ja) |
EP (1) | EP2351742A4 (ja) |
JP (1) | JPWO2010041568A1 (ja) |
KR (1) | KR20110050733A (ja) |
CN (1) | CN102171191A (ja) |
AU (1) | AU2009301797B2 (ja) |
CA (1) | CA2737349A1 (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2010041568A1 (ja) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2011040510A1 (ja) * | 2009-09-30 | 2011-04-07 | 旭化成ファーマ株式会社 | インダゾール類縁体 |
JP2018508560A (ja) * | 2015-03-19 | 2018-03-29 | 中国科学院上海薬物研究所Shanghai Institute Of Materia Medica, Chinese Academy Of Sciences | 三環類似体、その製造方法及び使用 |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR20110050734A (ko) * | 2008-10-09 | 2011-05-16 | 아사히 가세이 파마 가부시키가이샤 | 인다졸 화합물 |
Citations (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2787515A (en) * | 1957-04-02 | Nitroso derivatives | ||
WO1997025311A1 (fr) | 1996-01-10 | 1997-07-17 | Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Nouveaux composes tricycliques et compositions medicamenteuses contenant ces composes |
WO1999031045A1 (fr) | 1997-12-18 | 1999-06-24 | Kissei Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Derives d'acide phenylaminoalkylcarboxylique et compositions medicamenteuses les contenant |
WO1999051564A1 (en) * | 1998-04-06 | 1999-10-14 | Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Propanolamine derivatives |
WO2001017962A1 (fr) | 1999-09-03 | 2001-03-15 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Procede de preparation de derives d'amino alcool tricyclique |
WO2001083451A1 (fr) | 2000-04-28 | 2001-11-08 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Nouveaux composés bicycliques |
WO2002074306A1 (fr) * | 2001-03-19 | 2002-09-26 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Remedes pour la steatose hepatique |
WO2003035620A1 (fr) | 2001-10-25 | 2003-05-01 | Asahi Kasei Pharma Corporation | Compose bicyclique |
WO2007026630A1 (ja) | 2005-08-29 | 2007-03-08 | Kissei Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | 涙液の減少に伴う疾患の予防又は治療剤 |
Family Cites Families (33)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DE2429253A1 (de) | 1974-06-19 | 1976-01-15 | Boehringer Sohn Ingelheim | Phenylalkanolamine |
FR2332010A1 (fr) | 1975-11-18 | 1977-06-17 | Continental Pharma | Amino-alcool heterocyclique, son sel et son procede de preparation |
DE2833140A1 (de) | 1978-07-28 | 1980-02-07 | Boehringer Sohn Ingelheim | Neue n-substituierte heterocyclen |
JPS5553262A (en) | 1978-10-17 | 1980-04-18 | Yamanouchi Pharmaceut Co Ltd | Phenylethanolamine derivative |
DE3061334D1 (en) | 1979-06-16 | 1983-01-20 | Beecham Group Plc | Ethanamine derivatives, their preparation and use in pharmaceutical compositions |
JPS5950671B2 (ja) | 1982-08-26 | 1984-12-10 | 山之内製薬株式会社 | フェニルエタノ−ルアミン誘導体およびその製造法 |
GB8419797D0 (en) | 1984-08-03 | 1984-09-05 | Beecham Group Plc | Compounds |
FI92189C (fi) | 1986-03-17 | 1994-10-10 | Eisai Co Ltd | Menetelmä lääkeaineina käyttökelpoisen difenyylimetaanijohdannaisen valmistamiseksi |
US5061727A (en) | 1990-05-04 | 1991-10-29 | American Cyanamid Company | Substituted 5-(2-((2-aryl-2-hydroxyethyl)amino)propyl)-1,3-benzodioxoles |
ATE154935T1 (de) * | 1993-06-14 | 1997-07-15 | Pfizer | Zweite amine als antidiabetische mittel und für die behandlung von fettleibigkeit |
US5776983A (en) | 1993-12-21 | 1998-07-07 | Bristol-Myers Squibb Company | Catecholamine surrogates useful as β3 agonists |
IL113410A (en) | 1994-04-26 | 1999-11-30 | Merck & Co Inc | Substituted sulfonamides having an asymmetric center and pharmaceutical compositions containing them |
JPH08165276A (ja) | 1994-12-14 | 1996-06-25 | Dainippon Pharmaceut Co Ltd | 2−アルキルアミノ−1−フェニルエタノール誘導体 |
EP0828712A1 (en) | 1995-05-10 | 1998-03-18 | Pfizer Inc. | Beta-adrenergic agonists |
US5859044A (en) * | 1996-07-31 | 1999-01-12 | Pfizer Inc. | β-adrenergic agonists |
DE997458T1 (de) | 1997-07-03 | 2001-03-01 | Asahi Chemical Ind | Tricyclische verbindungen mit gesättigten ringen und diese enthaltende medizinische zubereitungen |
AU751833B2 (en) | 1998-12-15 | 2002-08-29 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Novel heterocyclic compounds and drug compositions containing the same |
TW519537B (en) | 1999-03-26 | 2003-02-01 | Asahi Chemical Ind | Process for the preparation of tricylic amino-alcohol derivatives |
AU3551000A (en) | 1999-03-31 | 2000-10-23 | Albert Hedegard | Storage container for a tractor |
WO2000059885A1 (fr) | 1999-04-01 | 2000-10-12 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Procede de preparation de derives d'alcools amines tricycliques avec des azides |
WO2001044187A1 (fr) * | 1999-12-16 | 2001-06-21 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Nouveaux composes tricycliques substitues |
US7217722B2 (en) | 2000-02-01 | 2007-05-15 | Kirin Beer Kabushiki Kaisha | Nitrogen-containing compounds having kinase inhibitory activity and drugs containing the same |
AU2001252573A1 (en) | 2000-04-28 | 2001-11-12 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Novel substituted tricyclic compounds |
AU2001252575A1 (en) | 2000-04-28 | 2001-11-12 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Novel tricyclic compounds |
AR035425A1 (es) | 2001-01-30 | 2004-05-26 | Teijin Ltd | Cristal de diclorhidrato del acido 3-(3-amidinofenil)-5-[({[1-(iminoetil)-4-piperidil]metil}amino)metil]benzoico y proceso para prepararlo |
EP1403255A4 (en) * | 2001-06-12 | 2005-04-06 | Sumitomo Pharma | INHIBITORS OF RHO KINASE |
EP1514869A1 (en) * | 2002-06-12 | 2005-03-16 | Sumitomo Pharmaceuticals Company, Limited | Indole, indazole, and benzazole derivative |
WO2004089936A1 (ja) * | 2003-04-10 | 2004-10-21 | Dainippon Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | ヘテロアリールスルホン酸アニリド誘導体及びそれを含有する医薬組成物 |
WO2006132196A1 (ja) * | 2005-06-08 | 2006-12-14 | Asahi Kasei Pharma Corporation | β3作動薬を含有する新規な医薬 |
TW200736245A (en) | 2005-11-29 | 2007-10-01 | Sankyo Co | Acid addition salts of optically active dihydropyridine derivatives |
KR20100122512A (ko) | 2008-07-17 | 2010-11-22 | 아사히 가세이 파마 가부시키가이샤 | 질소 함유 이환성 복소환 화합물 |
KR20110050734A (ko) | 2008-10-09 | 2011-05-16 | 아사히 가세이 파마 가부시키가이샤 | 인다졸 화합물 |
JP2010111624A (ja) * | 2008-11-06 | 2010-05-20 | Shionogi & Co Ltd | Ttk阻害作用を有するインダゾール誘導体 |
-
2009
- 2009-09-29 JP JP2010532879A patent/JPWO2010041568A1/ja active Pending
- 2009-09-29 EP EP09819103A patent/EP2351742A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2009-09-29 AU AU2009301797A patent/AU2009301797B2/en not_active Ceased
- 2009-09-29 CA CA2737349A patent/CA2737349A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2009-09-29 CN CN2009801390168A patent/CN102171191A/zh active Pending
- 2009-09-29 US US12/569,324 patent/US8304443B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2009-09-29 KR KR1020117007956A patent/KR20110050733A/ko not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2009-09-29 WO PCT/JP2009/066895 patent/WO2010041568A1/ja active Application Filing
Patent Citations (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2787515A (en) * | 1957-04-02 | Nitroso derivatives | ||
WO1997025311A1 (fr) | 1996-01-10 | 1997-07-17 | Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Nouveaux composes tricycliques et compositions medicamenteuses contenant ces composes |
WO1999031045A1 (fr) | 1997-12-18 | 1999-06-24 | Kissei Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Derives d'acide phenylaminoalkylcarboxylique et compositions medicamenteuses les contenant |
WO1999051564A1 (en) * | 1998-04-06 | 1999-10-14 | Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Propanolamine derivatives |
WO2001017962A1 (fr) | 1999-09-03 | 2001-03-15 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Procede de preparation de derives d'amino alcool tricyclique |
WO2001083451A1 (fr) | 2000-04-28 | 2001-11-08 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Nouveaux composés bicycliques |
WO2002074306A1 (fr) * | 2001-03-19 | 2002-09-26 | Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha | Remedes pour la steatose hepatique |
WO2003035620A1 (fr) | 2001-10-25 | 2003-05-01 | Asahi Kasei Pharma Corporation | Compose bicyclique |
WO2007026630A1 (ja) | 2005-08-29 | 2007-03-08 | Kissei Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | 涙液の減少に伴う疾患の予防又は治療剤 |
Non-Patent Citations (86)
Title |
---|
"Electrocardiography, Echocardiography, Blood Pressure, and Pathology test of an Animal for Basic and Clinical Medicine", 2003, MARUZEN |
"Guidelines for Genetic Toxicity Test", PHARMACEUTICALS EXAMINATION, vol. 1604, 1999 |
"Guidelines for Genetic Toxicity Test", PHARMACEUTICALS EXAMINATION, vol. 1604, 1999, pages 11 - 2 |
"Guidelines for Genetic Toxicity Test", PHARMACEUTICALS EXAMINATION, vol. 1604, 1999, pages 11 - 4 |
"Guidelines for Genetic Toxicity Test", PHARMACEUTICALS. EXAMINATION, vol. 1604, 1999 |
"Guidelines for Non-clinical test of pharmaceuticals - Explanation", 2002, YAKUJI NIPPO LIMITED, pages: 1 - 6 |
"Guidelines for Non-clinical test of pharmaceuticals - Explanation", 2002, YAKUJI NIPPO LIMITED, pages: 1 - 9 |
"Guidelines for Toxicity Test for Pharmaceuticals", PHARMACEUTICALS EXAMINATION, vol. 1834, 2000 |
"Local Lymph Node Assay method", OECD GUIDELINE FOR THE TESTING OF CHEMICALS 429, SKIN SENSITIZATION, 2002 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 19, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 438 - 446 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 19, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 65 - 171 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 20, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 112 - 114 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 20, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 187 - 200 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 21, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 1 - 23 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 25, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 59 - 82 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 25, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 60 - 72 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 26, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 159 - 266 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 26, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 23 - 68 |
"New Experimental Chemistry Series", vol. 26, MARUZEN COMPANY, LIMITED, pages: 68 - 158 |
"Newest aspects in mass spectrometry for biological sciences", 2002, KODANSHA SCIENTIFIC |
"OrganoFluorine Chemistry", BLACKWELL, pages: 257 - 292,310 |
"Physiology", 1986 |
"Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis", 2007, JOHN WILEY AND SONS |
BERGE, J. PHARM. SCI., 1977, pages 1 - 19 |
BEVAN, C.D. ET AL., ANAL. CHEM., vol. 72, 2000, pages 1781 - 1787 |
BR. J. PHARMACOL., vol. 147, 2006, pages S88 - SLL9 |
BRAIN RES. MOL. BRAIN RES., vol. 29, no. 2, 1995, pages 369 - 375 |
BRITISH JOURNAL OF PHARMACOLOGY, vol. 122, 1997, pages 1720 - 1724 |
BUEHLER, E.V., ARCH. DERMATOL., vol. 91, 1965, pages 171 - 177 |
CHACHIN, M. ET AL., NIPPON YAKURIGAKU ZASSHI, vol. 119, 2002, pages 345 - 351 |
CHENG, C.S. ET AL., DRUG DEVELOP. INDUST. PHARM., vol. 28, 2002, pages 177 - 191 |
CLIVE, D. ET AL., MUTAT. RES., vol. 31, 1975, pages 17 - 29 |
COLE, J. ET AL., MUTAT. RES., vol. 111, 1983, pages 371 - 386 |
CURRENT TOPICS IN MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 7, 2007, pages 135 - 145 |
DELIE, F. ET AL., CRIT. REV. THER. DRUG CARRIER SYST., vol. 14, 1997, pages 221 - 286 |
DORN, A. ET AL., J. BIOMOL. SCREEN., vol. 10, 2005, pages 339 - 347 |
DRORBAUGH, J.E. ET AL., PEDIATRICS, vol. 16, 1955, pages 81 - 87 |
DRUG DEVELOPMENT RESEARCH, vol. 32, 1994, pages 69 - 76 |
DRUGS OF THE FUTURE, vol. 18, no. 6, 1993, pages 529 - 549 |
DUCIC, I. ET AL., J. CARDIOVASC. PHARMACOL., vol. 30, no. 1, 1997, pages 42 - 54 |
EPSTEIN, M.A. ET AL., RESPIR. PHYSIOL., vol. 32, 1978, pages 105 - 120 |
EUR. J. PHAMACOL., vol. 289, 1995, pages 223 - 228 |
EUR. J. PHAMACOL., vol. 375, 1999, pages 261 - 276 |
FENECH, M. ET AL., MUTAT. RES., vol. 147, 1985, pages 29 - 36 |
FUKUI, N. ET AL., GENDAI NO RINSHO, vol. 4, no. 7, 1970, pages 277 - 289 |
GERMANN, U.A., METHODS ENZYMOL., vol. 292, 1998, pages 427 - 41 |
GILBERT, J.D. ET AL., J. PHARM. TOX. METHODS, vol. 50, 2004, pages 187 - 199 |
GOMEZ-LECHON, M.J. ET AL., CURR. DRUG METAB., vol. 5, no. 5, 2004, pages 443 - 462 |
HARBER, L.C., ARCH. DERMATOL., vol. 96, 1967, pages 646 - 653 |
HAYASHI, M. ET AL., ENVIRON. MOL. MUTAGEN., vol. 35, 2000, pages 234 - 252 |
HAYASHI, M. ET AL., MUTAT. RES., vol. 312, 1994, pages 293 - 304 |
HENGSTLER, J.G. ET AL., DRUG METAB. REV., vol. 32, 2000, pages 81 - 118 |
HORIO, T., J. INVEST. DERMATOL., vol. 67, 1976, pages 591 - 593 |
ICHIKAWA, H. ET AL., J. INVEST. DERMATOL., vol. 76, 1981, pages 498 - 501 |
INGELS, F.M. ET AL., J. PHAM. SCI., vol. 92, 2003, pages 1545 - 1558 |
INT. J. OBES. RELAT. METAB. DISORD., vol. 20, 1996, pages 191 - 199 |
IRVINE, J.D. ET AL., J. PHAM. SCI., vol. 88, 1999, pages 28 - 33 |
IRWIN, S., COMPREHENSIVE OBSERVATIONAL ASSESSMENT, vol. 13, 1968, pages 222 - 257 |
ISHIYAMA, M. ET AL., IN VITRO TOXICOLOGY, vol. 8, 1995, pages 187 |
J. CLIN. INVEST., vol. 101, 1998, pages 2387 - 2393 |
J. PHARMACOL. EXP. THER., vol. 288, 1999, pages 1367 - 1373 |
J. URINOL., vol. 161, 1999, pages 680 - 685 |
JORDAN, W.P., CONTACT DERMATITIS, vol. 8, 1982, pages 109 - 116 |
KATO, M. ET AL., DRUG METAB. PHARMACOKINET., vol. 20, no. 4, 2005, pages 236 - 243 |
KOCHEVER, I.E. ET AL., J. INVEST. DERMATOL., vol. 73, 1979, pages 144 - 146 |
KRIEF. ET AL., J. CLIN. INVEST., vol. 91, 1993, pages 344 - 349 |
LI, C. ET AL., DRUG METAB. DISPOS., vol. 34, no. 6, 2006, pages 901 - 905 |
LIPINSKI, C.A. ET AL., ADV. DRUG DELIV. REV., vol. 23, 1997, pages 3 - 26 |
MAGNUSSON, B. ET AL., J. INVEST. DERMATOL., vol. 52, 1969, pages 268 - 276 |
MATSUO, S., MEDICINA, vol. 40, 2003, pages 188 |
MATTSON, J. L. ET AL., J. AMERICAN COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY, vol. 15, no. 3, 1996, pages 239 - 254 |
MAURER, T. ET AL., BR. J. DERMATOL., vol. 63, 1980, pages 593 - 605 |
MILLER, B. ET AL., MUTAT. RES., vol. 392, 1997, pages 45 - 59 |
MILLER, V.P. ET AL., ANN. N.Y. ACAD. SCI., vol. 919, 2000, pages 26 - 32 |
MORIKAWA, F. ET AL.: "Sunlight and man", 1974, TOKYO UNIV. PRESS, pages: 529 - 557 |
MURAKI, K. ET AL., AM. J. PHYSIOL., vol. 269, 1995, pages H524 - 532 |
NATURE, vol. 309, 1984, pages 163 - 165 |
PHARMACOLOGY, vol. 51, 1995, pages 288 - 297 |
SATO, Y. ET AL., CONTACT DERMATITIS, vol. 7, 1981, pages 225 - 237 |
SHOU, W.Z. ET AL., J. MASS SPECTROM., vol. 40, no. 10, 2005, pages 1347 - 1356 |
TAKEYOSHI, M. ET AL., J. APPL. TOXICOL., vol. 25, no. 2, 2005, pages 129 - 34 |
TAKEYOSHI, M. ET AL., TOXICOL. LETT., vol. 119, no. 3, 2001, pages 203 - 8 |
TAMAI I. ET AL., PHARM RES., vol. 18, no. 9, September 2001 (2001-09-01), pages 1262 - 1269 |
THE JOURNAL OF UROLOGY, vol. 170, 2003, pages 649 - 653 |
VINSON, L.J., J. SOC. COSM. CHEM., vol. 17, 1966, pages 123 - 130 |
YAMASHITA, S. ET AL., EUR. J. PHAM. SCI., vol. 10, 2000, pages 195 - 204 |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2011040510A1 (ja) * | 2009-09-30 | 2011-04-07 | 旭化成ファーマ株式会社 | インダゾール類縁体 |
JP2018508560A (ja) * | 2015-03-19 | 2018-03-29 | 中国科学院上海薬物研究所Shanghai Institute Of Materia Medica, Chinese Academy Of Sciences | 三環類似体、その製造方法及び使用 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
AU2009301797A1 (en) | 2010-04-15 |
JPWO2010041568A1 (ja) | 2012-03-08 |
EP2351742A4 (en) | 2012-03-28 |
AU2009301797B2 (en) | 2012-03-01 |
CN102171191A (zh) | 2011-08-31 |
US8304443B2 (en) | 2012-11-06 |
EP2351742A1 (en) | 2011-08-03 |
EP2351742A8 (en) | 2011-09-21 |
KR20110050733A (ko) | 2011-05-16 |
US20100152265A1 (en) | 2010-06-17 |
CA2737349A1 (en) | 2010-04-09 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
TWI557110B (zh) | 作為5-ht6拮抗劑的芳基磺醯基吡唑啉羧脒衍生物 | |
WO2006078006A1 (ja) | インドール類およびそれを含む医薬組成物 | |
TWI360540B (en) | Tetrahydroisoquinolylsulphonamide derivatives, the | |
JP7450606B2 (ja) | ヘテロアリール置換スルホンアミド化合物および治療剤としてのそれらの使用 | |
JP2011520954A (ja) | フェニルまたはピリジニル置換インダゾール誘導体 | |
TW201002708A (en) | Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof | |
WO2016039408A1 (ja) | 複素環化合物 | |
JP6975515B2 (ja) | Trpa1モデュレーターとしてのスルホニルシクロアルキルカルボキサミド化合物 | |
CA2792918C (en) | Benzazepine compound | |
WO2010041568A1 (ja) | インダゾール誘導体 | |
US8008506B2 (en) | Indazole compounds | |
CN101166737A (zh) | 磷酸二酯酶4抑制剂 | |
WO2011040510A1 (ja) | インダゾール類縁体 | |
US10538523B2 (en) | 4-(biphen-3-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-c]pyridazine derivatives of formula (I) as GABA receptor modulators for use in the treatment of epilepsy and pain | |
JP2008544982A (ja) | アルファ7ニコチン性受容体調節剤としてのチオフェン−2−カルボキサミド誘導体 | |
ES2866324T3 (es) | Derivados de 1-(1-hidroxi-2,3-dihidro-1H-inden5-il)-urea y compuestos similares como activadores del canal KCNQ2-5 para el tratamiento de la disuria | |
JP2023518299A (ja) | 小分子エナンチオマーによるアンドロゲン受容体調節 | |
TW201008924A (en) | Fluoro-substituted 3,4-diaryl-4,5-dihydro-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxamidine derivatives having CB1-antagonistic activity | |
JP2004323519A (ja) | スルホン酸アニリド誘導体及びそれを含有する医薬組成物 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 200980139016.8 Country of ref document: CN |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 09819103 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2010532879 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2737349 Country of ref document: CA |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20117007956 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2009819103 Country of ref document: EP |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2009301797 Country of ref document: AU Date of ref document: 20090929 Kind code of ref document: A |